549300L5FZ06J1914B442025-01-012025-12-31iso4217:GBP549300L5FZ06J1914B442024-01-012024-12-31549300L5FZ06J1914B442025-12-31549300L5FZ06J1914B442024-12-31549300L5FZ06J1914B442024-12-31ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember549300L5FZ06J1914B442024-12-31ifrs-full:ReserveOfGainsAndLossesOnFinancialAssetsMeasuredAtFairValueThroughOtherComprehensiveIncomeMember549300L5FZ06J1914B442024-12-31ifrs-full:RevaluationSurplusMember549300L5FZ06J1914B442025-01-012025-12-31ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember549300L5FZ06J1914B442025-01-012025-12-31ifrs-full:ReserveOfGainsAndLossesOnFinancialAssetsMeasuredAtFairValueThroughOtherComprehensiveIncomeMember549300L5FZ06J1914B442025-01-012025-12-31ifrs-full:RevaluationSurplusMember549300L5FZ06J1914B442025-12-31ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember549300L5FZ06J1914B442025-12-31ifrs-full:ReserveOfGainsAndLossesOnFinancialAssetsMeasuredAtFairValueThroughOtherComprehensiveIncomeMember549300L5FZ06J1914B442025-12-31ifrs-full:RevaluationSurplusMember549300L5FZ06J1914B442023-12-31ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember549300L5FZ06J1914B442023-12-31ifrs-full:ReserveOfGainsAndLossesOnFinancialAssetsMeasuredAtFairValueThroughOtherComprehensiveIncomeMember549300L5FZ06J1914B442023-12-31ifrs-full:RevaluationSurplusMember549300L5FZ06J1914B442023-12-31549300L5FZ06J1914B442024-01-012024-12-31ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember549300L5FZ06J1914B442024-01-012024-12-31ifrs-full:ReserveOfGainsAndLossesOnFinancialAssetsMeasuredAtFairValueThroughOtherComprehensiveIncomeMember549300L5FZ06J1914B442024-01-012024-12-31ifrs-full:RevaluationSurplusMember
Page | 2 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Page | 2 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Key Highlights
6,668
New mortgage
customers
£4.3
bn
Total mortgage
assets
Delivering a resilient performance
while strengthening our f
oundations
for sustainable, long‑term growth
1.62%
Net interest
margin
11
bps
ECL
coverage ratio
(2024:
12bps)
member service, whilst moderating
lending to focus on investment and
strengthen resilience for future growth
64.3%
Net promoter
score
£4.6
bn
Total
savings
balance
Delivering increased value for our
members, with higher savings
balances and greater interest paid
throughout the year
3,938
hrs
Colleague
volunteering
£16.7
m
Profit before tax
(2024: £13.9m)
£20.9
m
Underlying profit
before tax
Another record year of giving back,
as colleagues continued to increase
their volunteering commitment
across our communities
14.1%
5.1%
236%
Positive movement
Adverse movement
Stable
CET1 ratio
Leverage ratio
Average LCR
(2024: 13.7%)
(2024: 4.9%)
(2024: 172%)
4.8
Trustpilot
Score
£883m
Gross new lending
(2024: £1,215m)
£164.3m
Total interest paid to
savers
(2024: £154.6m)
Page | 3 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Contents
4
Chair’s Statement
5
Chief Executive’s Review
8
Strategic Report
16
Stakeholder Engagement Report
17
Corporate Responsibility Report
18
Sustainability Report
21
Your Board of Directors
23
Directors’ Report
25
Nomination Committee Report
26
Risk Management Report
31
Board Risk Committee Report
32
Corporate Governance Report
35
Board Audit Committee Report
37
Directors’ Remuneration Report
41
Independent Auditor’s Report
48
Income Statements
49
Statements of Comprehensive Income
50
Statements of Financial Position
51
Statements of Changes in Members’ Interests
52
Cash Flow Statements
53
Notes to the Accounts
94
Annual Business Statement
96
Glossary
Page | 4 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Chair’s Statement
Chairman’s Introduction 2025
2025 has been a year of consolidation and intentional enhancement for
Nottingham Building Society (“NBS” or “the Society”) as we continued to embed
the foundations laid in recent years. Against this backdrop, I am pleased to
introduce the Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 2025.
In 2026, focus moves from strengthening our core foundations to preparing the
organisation for growth.
Staying resilient amid shifting global tides
During 2025, global uncertainty increased as markets responded to new US
administration policies and tariff developments as well as ongoing wars which
played out both physically and technologically. Domestically, the 2025 Autumn
Budget added further unpredictability, contributing to a more subdued mortgage
market.
Despite these challenges, NBS delivered a resilient performance, with total assets
reaching £5.4bn. Entering the year on the back of two consecutive years of strong
double-digit growth, the Society targeted lower levels of lending in 2025. This has
allowed us to consolidate the substantial technology and service investments
made to date, ensuring we remain well positioned for sustainable, long-term
growth.
During 2025, we operated in a highly competitive savings market, with funding
costs continuing to reprice and mortgage demand remaining subdued. Against
that backdrop, we remained disciplined in managing margins, so that we could
reward savers fairly while ensuring our lending remained responsible and
sustainable for borrowers. In practice, this meant continuing to offer
competitive savings rates and a secure home for members’ deposits, while
applying prudent pricing and underwriting standards across our mortgage
book. The strength of this approach is evident in our exceptionally low arrears
levels, underpinned by the resilience of our members and the care we take in
lending decisions.
We also remained mindful of the need to manage our capital prudently, and our
disciplined approach this year reflects the importance of protecting our capital
buffers whilst investing in core capabilities and maintaining strategic momentum.
Alongside navigating the external pressures, we continued to progress the long-
term improvements that will define the Society we aim to be in the years ahead.
Building the modern mutual our members deserve
Putting members first remains central to our role as a mutual. Throughout 2025,
we continued to embed the Financial Conduct Authority’s Consumer Duty
requirements across our governance, culture, and decision-making. Our
commitment to delivering good outcomes for savers and borrowers is
unwavering.
To achieve that, our focus moved towards building on and maintaining a robust,
secure, and flexible operating model that is essential for the future of the Society.
Throughout the year, the Board oversaw major investment in NBS’s cyber
security, resilience and core banking capability. Good progress was made in 2025
and will continue in 2026 in upgrading our core banking platform and laying the
foundations for our future cloud and data architecture.
Alongside this, we continued the rollout of our refreshed brand identity, following
its launch in late 2024. The opening of our flagship branch on Clumber Street, the
busiest high street in Nottingham, and the rebranding of branches in St Albans,
Arnold, and West Bridgford has strengthened our presence on the high street and
supported increased recognition across our digital estate. The process of
rebranding our branches will continue in 2026, starting with our branches in North
Hykeham and Mansfield, and beyond.
Much of the work we have undertaken this year ensures we have the agility,
resilience, and capability required to achieve that and to operate successfully in a
sector undergoing rapid change and a period of consolidation.
Lastly, we also continued supporting members affected by the Philips Trust
Corporation (‘PTC’), working closely with the administrators as the process enters
its final stages.
Making a measurable difference in our communities
Whilst much of our transformation has focused on strengthening our foundations,
our purpose as a mutual extends far beyond systems and processes. I am proud
of the meaningful difference NBS continued to make in our communities in 2025.
Our ongoing partnerships with Emmanuel House, Shelter, and ThinkForward
reflect our commitment to tackling homelessness, improving social mobility, and
supporting young people across Nottinghamshire.
Colleague volunteering reached 3,938 hours, reflecting another record-breaking
year. Within the Society, engagement scores remained resilient, demonstrating
the passion and dedication our colleagues bring to their roles. We were also
delighted that the Society was shortlisted for the Community Impact Award at
the East Midlands Business of the Year Awards in October 2025, a recognition
that belongs entirely to our colleagues and the lengths they have gone to in order
to make an impact for our members and wider communities.
Looking ahead with confidence and caution, but also purpose
As we look to 2026 and beyond, the Board recognises the need for optionality
and the ability to respond at pace as opportunities and challenges emerge whilst
also retaining a real focus on the strategy.
The outlook for the mutual sector remains encouraging, and we are working
closely with the Building Societies Association (‘BSA’) in terms of the government
agenda to double the size of the mutual sector. There are tailwinds which also
make us optimistic with strong housing demand and growing consumer
appreciation of the value mutuals offer.
Further to this, we welcomed the joint statement from the Financial Conduct
Authority (‘FCA’) and Prudential Regulation Authority (‘PRA’) outlining their
commitment to doubling the size of the mutuals sector and introducing
measures to support long-term growth. Initiatives such as the new FCA Scale-
up Unit and the Mutual Societies Development Unit, alongside broader
simplification of the prudential framework, signal a more supportive policy
environment for building societies. This regulatory direction aligns strongly
with our purpose and reinforces the role mutuals play in promoting financial
resilience, inclusion and consumer trust.
However, we are not immune to the challenges ahead, which include evolving
regulatory requirements. This includes the introduction of the new Small
Domestic Deposit Taker (‘SDDT’) framework by the PRA and Bank of England
(‘BoE’), designed to simplify the prudential regime for small domestic deposit
takers, ahead of the wider capital regime coming into effect in January 2027.
These developments, together with heightened cyber risks, the pace of
technological change, and increased competition, require continued vigilance
and an ability to keep pace with evolving expectations. Government-led efforts
to stimulate growth may also accelerate competitive activity across the
mortgage market.
The Board remains focused on steering the Society through these pressures with
prudence and clarity of purpose. We will continue advocating for regulation that
reflects the size and risk profile of building societies, enabling us to invest
confidently in innovation and service.
This was my first full year as Chair, and I would like to finish by acknowledging
the continued professionalism and commitment of our colleagues. Their
dedication to our members throughout a period of significant change reflects
the very best of our mutual values. I also extend our thanks to Simon Linares,
who stepped down from the Board in November after six years, and wish him
well for the future. We were pleased to welcome Chris Sparks as Chair of Board
Risk Committee (‘BRC’) and Clodagh Gunnigle as Chair of the Remuneration
Committee (‘RemCo’) during the year. Their extensive banking, risk,
transformation, and people leadership expertise further strengthens our Board
for the future.
I also announce that Anthony Murphy has decided to step down as Chief
Financial Officer to spend more time with his family in Ireland. He will leave the
Board and the Society in May 2026. The process to appoint his successor is
under way, with an update to follow in due course. On behalf of the Board, I
would like to thank Anthony for his notable contribution. The Society he leaves
behind is stronger and better positioned to achieve sustainable, long-term
growth for our members both today and in the future.
To conclude, on behalf of the Board, I would like to thank our members for their
continued loyalty and trust in NBS. As Chair, I remain committed to ensuring our
members stay at the heart of our Society and at the forefront of every decision
we make.
Robin Ashton
Chair
4
th
March 2026
Page | 5 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Chief Executive’s Review
Chief Executive’s Review 2025
I would like to start by recognising and thanking our fantastic colleagues,
whose commitment and hard work has been central to everything we have
achieved this year.
I am proud of the way they have supported our members through a period
of significant operational and technological change. I would also like to thank
our three hundred thousand members for their loyalty and trust, and
acknowledge the contribution of our valued partners, particularly all of our
mortgage intermediaries, Gen H, and MQube, who all played a vital role in
helping homebuyers secure the funding they need.
I am also proud of the Executive and Leadership team and the teams they
lead in terms of what they are delivering for all of our members on our
transformation journey. In terms of the Executive, we said farewell to Paul
Howley who has led much of our transformation and Praven Subbramoney
who led our lending business.
During the year, we welcomed Russ Thornton who has immense technology
delivery capability and Aaron Shinwell who has picked up the mantle of
delivering to our future lending segments. In addition, we saw Harriet
Guevara move to leading our savings offering and Sally Gaudion to lead
customer and operational resilience.
We welcomed Riaan Thiart as our new Head of Audit which is a strategically
important role to ensure we are robust and thorough in assessing all of our
key risks. He and the new audit team are a significant support to the delivery
of our agenda and holding us all to account.
I would like to thank Anthony Murphy for his significant contribution. During
his time, we achieved strong profitable growth, significantly enhanced the
rigour and quality of our financial management and regulatory reporting, and
established our partnership with Gen H. We also delivered our inaugural
public Residential Mortgage‑Backed Securitisation (‘RMBS’) issuance, a
landmark transaction that demonstrated the increasing sophistication of our
treasury capabilities. I have greatly valued our close working relationship and
wish Anthony the very best for the future.
Finally, thank you to our Board for their continued stewardship, advice, and
support.
A look back at a year of consolidation, discipline, and delivery
2025 has been a year of deliberate consolidation for the Society, following
two years of strong double‑digit growth. We made a conscious decision to
moderate lending while continuing to prioritise substantial investments in
our technology, systems, processes, and capabilities to strengthen
long‑term resilience and enhance our operating foundations.
This ongoing programme builds on the transformation of recent years and
ensures the Society is prepared for its next phase of purposeful innovation
and sustainable growth. The pricing of new lending has reflected the
increasingly specialist nature of our proposition, and the new capability will
enable us to scale this further. Despite the conscious decision to curtail
growth, the Society has delivered a robust set of results, with statutory
profit before tax increasing to £16.7m (2024: £13.9m).
Consolidation with intent
Concluding this year of consolidation marks the natural next phase of the
strategy, where the focus moves from building core foundations to preparing
the organisation for a further period of purposeful innovation and growth and
the next stage of our evolution as a specialist residential lender. The focus on
consolidation shaped every aspect of our activity during the year, particularly
across our lending business.
Lending with purpose as we navigated turbulence and embedded
transformation
As we strengthened our technology and foundations, we also continued to
move towards the specialist lending segments that sit at the heart of our long-
term strategy, particularly our Extra Ordinary Borrowers (“EOBs”).
Operating in a volatile environment
The external environment this year presented significant challenges. Global
markets reacted unpredictably to policy shifts from the new US
administration, including tariff developments, whilst in the UK, the 2025
Budget in November contributed to more cautious borrowing and subdued
activity in the mortgage market.
The growing threat of cyber-attacks represents significant challenges across all
sectors and continents, and we should all expect this to increase. We need to
continue to ensure we are as prepared as possible to deal with that threat, with
significant focus put on maintaining our operational resilience capabilities. At
some point, all organisations can expect to be impacted and their ability to
respond and recover is one of the most important things any organisation can
prepare for.
Even with this heightened level of uncertainty and the need to put additional
emphasis on our foundations, our core principles remained unchanged,
and we remained firmly focused on delivering strong member service and offering
great value products.
Embedding capability to support specialist lending
In 2025, we report that new mortgage lending totalled £0.9bn, compared to
£1.2bn in 2024. This deliberate reduction enabled us to implement, embed, and
start to scale a new mortgage platform, delivered in partnership with MQube,
which supported nearly half of our residential lending in December 2025. We are
proud to be the first building society to have partnered with MQube to bring this
technology to the intermediary market.
The new mortgage platform has already started to transform our lending service
with significantly shorter time to offer a mortgage. For brokers, the new platform
represents a step change. The platform allows us to respond more quickly to
market needs, supporting increased capacity without increasing cost-to-serve,
and the delivery of smarter, more personalised mortgage options for a wider
range of members. The integrated Artificial Intelligence (‘AI’) allows us to analyse
documents efficiently, enabling lending decisions and supporting more difficult
lending cases. Further steps are being taken to enhance this with new decisioning
capability and to scale further in 2026, with key integrations taking place to further
enhance the service we deliver to our intermediary partners.
Building momentum in specialist markets
Our aim for 2026 is to build further momentum and impact in these specialist
segments, increasing our market share whilst maintaining a responsible and
sustainable approach that has differentiated our lending to date. The progress we
have made in specialist lending, even prior to the new capability being delivered,
reinforces our belief in the long-term opportunity these borrowers and
intermediaries represent.
We continued to develop and grow our specialist lending proposition through our
partnership with Gen H. To date, this partnership has resulted in the creation of
over 5,000 new homeowners funded by approximately £1.0 billion of forward-
flow funding. We will also consider further inorganic partnerships in 2026 to
support our growth.
Our mortgage book performed strongly throughout the year, with strong margins
in new business and arrears levels remaining exceptionally low. These outcomes
reinforce our confidence that we can continue to outperform peers in the markets
where we choose to compete.
A standout year for savings performance
Strength in our mortgage performance was matched by continued momentum
across our savings franchise. Savings performance remained robust, with total
interest paid to savers reaching £164.3m, compared to £154.6m in 2024.
Strengthening our funding and resilience
We successfully navigated intense funding competition in the market following
the industry-wide repayment of the Term Funding Scheme with additional
incentives for Small and Medium sized Enterprises (‘TFSME’). Leveraging our
debut Public RMBS, we secured £350m of additional funding, which enabled us to
complete the repayment of our own TFSME facilities whilst managing margin
pressure responsibly. This transaction demonstrates our growing sophistication in
funding and further diversifies our funding base.
Delivering value and choice for savers
During the first half of 2025, we delivered a record Individual Savings Account
(‘ISA’) season. We delivered more than double the figure recorded in 2024,
generating £80 million Fixed ISA deposits in the month of April (2024: £38m). This
represents an incredible effort across both our branch and digital channels.
Our work this year also reinforced the importance of deepening relationships
across both savings and mortgage members, something we will continue to focus
on as part of our long-term member strategy.
Page | 6 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Chief Executive’s Review
Throughout 2025, we lobbied against proposed Cash ISA reforms. After two
delays earlier in the year, the Government made the decision to reduce the
annual tax-free Cash ISA allowance from £20,000 to £12,000 from April 2027
for the under 65s. This was a significant development for both savers and
lenders. Whilst we recognise the ambition to encourage a stronger
investment culture in the UK, our view remains that this should not come at
the expense of saver choice or financial confidence. Cash ISAs continue to
play a vital role for millions of households as a low-risk way to build financial
resilience, highlighted by the fact that our data showed us that two-thirds of
our own Cash ISA members had used the full £20,000 allowance last year.
We will continue to engage constructively with government and industry to
ensure that the interests of savers are fully reflected in future decisions, and
to advocate for a framework that supports both long-term financial wellbeing
and the strength of the mutual sector.
On the point of optionality, we know passbooks are valued by our members.
We also understand that the ability to see balances online is important, so we
have built the capability to have both – both physical and digital passbooks.
We began the process of implementing this at the end of 2025 and will
continue to roll this out to all members over the coming months. As a building
society, we’re committed to what our members value most. Our members
want passbooks, and we will continue to support that by offering all types.
More recently, we were pleased to be selected as part of the first cohort of
the Prudential Regulation Authority and Financial Conduct Authority’s new
Scale-up Unit. This initiative supports the Government’s wider growth agenda
and reflects the importance of creating the right regulatory conditions for
firms to scale sustainably. For Nottingham Building Society, this aligns closely
with our ambition as a modern mutual to grow at pace while maintaining
strong standards and long-term resilience.
A brand that reflects our ambition
Our brand evolution continued to take shape through 2025, most notably by
opening of our new flagship branch on Clumber Street. This was our first new
branch opening in eight years and marked a significant milestone for us and
our continued investment in the high street. The branch brought our
refreshed new brand to life in a physical and visible way for the first time,
showcasing our ambition to be a modern, accessible, and future-focused
mutual whilst maintaining the roots of our building society heritage. At the
same time, it reaffirmed our deep connection to Nottingham and our
presence in the heart of the city.
Every element of the new branch on Clumber Street was designed using
insight and feedback from the people who use it, reflecting how our members
want to bank today and tomorrow. Following the launch of the Clumber
Street branch, we have since rebranded our branches in St Albans, Arnold,
and West Bridgford, further strengthening our presence across the network.
The process of rolling the new branding out across our branch network will
continue throughout 2026.
Member feedback has been overwhelmingly positive, supported by
consistently strong Trustpilot ratings, while brand awareness continues to
grow across our digital channels and high street footprint, reinforcing our
position as a modern mutual.
Technology foundations that power the future
Underpinning progress across both lending and savings is the continued
transformation of our technology and operating platforms. 2025 was a
pivotal year for embedding our technology investments. We made strong
progress across:
• New mortgage platform and decisioning systems;
• Upgrades to existing systems;
• Resilience and cyber security enhancements;
• New Cloud environment to support innovation and data capability;
• AI adoption across broker and internal processes; and
• Change Excellence, which has now been shortlisted for two national
awards by The Learning Awards and The Learning Excellence Awards.
Taken together, this marks the transition from foundational modernisation to a
more innovation-led phase, where data, cloud capability, and AI will increasingly
shape the way we deliver a first-class service to members and brokers. This will
always be combined with passionate and member led colleagues in order to truly
achieve the best experience for all our members and intermediaries. These
investments are enabling us to operate with greater agility, insight and reliability.
Delivering a service that sets us apart
We were delighted to maintain our excellent 4.8 Trustpilot score from over 5,000
reviews, ensuring we continue to be ranked as one of the highest-rated building
societies on this platform. This reflects the dedication of colleagues across our
branches, digital services, and mortgage teams. Member service remains one of
our strongest differentiators and will continue to be a central focus.
Listening, learning, and improving
One of those differentiators includes the opening of our Colleague and Member
meeting room at our Head Office, a comfortable space for intermediaries,
members and colleagues to share their experiences and support us in our journey
to deliver the best member experience possible.
During 2025, we invited over 80 colleagues and customers into this space to
share their feedback with us directly, all with the aim of further developing and
improving our best-in-class customer experience.
Those strong service standards, especially during periods of transformation,
remain one of our most important differentiators in an increasingly competitive
and fast-moving lending and savings market.
Our ability to deliver for members is only possible because of the people who
bring our strategy to life every day.
Supporting our colleagues
Behind all of this are our colleagues, who are central to the success of our
transformation. As with previous reports, we have highlighted the need to
continue to review the key skills and capabilities we need and to both attract and
retain the right talent to take us through our transformation.
Building capability for the future
This year we invested significantly in building capability across the organisation,
supported by initiatives such as Change Excellence, a people-first, Society-wide
programme designed to equip all our colleagues with the skills, confidence, and
resilience to lead, deliver, and thrive through change.
The step change in the level of investment and focus we are putting on the
development of our colleagues has been marked in 2025 with the outcome being
better delivery for all of our members and a real improvement in our colleague
capability. This investment will continue in 2026 and beyond to ensure we are able
to deliver for our members and Intermediaries and the challenges and
opportunities we face.
Engagement scores remained stable during a period of considerable change. It’s
pleasing to see attrition levels reduce markedly, whilst we continued to see strong
participation in all of our development programmes.
These changes, alongside our shift towards more agile and streamlined ways of
working, ensure we continue to build the capability required for the next phase of
our strategy.
Showing up for our community in meaningful ways
In 2025, we contributed a total of £144,000 into our communities, almost 1% of
our 2024 pre-tax profit, and we’re proud of the positive impact that’s helped us
create together, with our partnerships with Emmanuel House, Shelter, and
ThinkForward continuing to grow this year.
The volunteering hours our colleagues continue to contribute is a reflection of the
Society we are and our commitment to our charity partnerships and communities.
Our branch colleagues gave an astonishing 3,125 hours of volunteer time, more
than ever before and 47% more than 2024. Our branch commitment is to have a
positive, lasting impact in all the local communities we serve.
Alongside our branch teams, colleagues across all locations gave working time to
charities and non-profits, too. 48% of our colleagues gave their working time to
support non-profit organisations, which accumulated to 3,938 hours (2024: 3,522
hours) of volunteer time. We’re proud of the year-on-year growth we’ve seen in
colleague contributions, truly living our mutual ethos and showing up for our local
communities.
Page | 7 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Chief Executive’s Review
Scaling our social impact
In 2024, we were proud to be a sponsor of the annual Notts Pride event. We
reaffirmed that commitment to inclusion and community by sponsoring the
event for a second successive year. We also expanded on that by becoming
the lead sponsor of the Belper Pride event for the first time, an initiative that
was driven forward by many of our colleagues in our internal Pride network.
As a culmination of all of our community initiatives, we were proud to be
shortlisted for the Community Impact Award at the East Midlands Business
of the Year Awards in October 2025, and we continued to support young
people through mentoring, events, and insight sessions.
As we look ahead to 2026, we are ambitious to further scale our Social Impact
programmes both through our charity relationships, our branch locations and
by continuing to support colleagues to have a lasting, meaningful impact on
our communities.
Looking to the future
Looking ahead, we expect continued economic uncertainty, including
subdued economic growth forecasts and further impacts from geopolitical
developments. We anticipate additional Bank Rate reductions, which will
require careful management of our Net Interest Margin (‘NIM’).
Our priorities for 2026 include:
• Delivering and scaling our specialist lending proposition and
continuing to increase our savings membership to support this;
• Continuing to improve the experience for members across every
channel;
• Embedding key technology investments;
• Further strengthening our operational resilience; and
• Progressing our data strategy and cloud foundations.
Optionality will remain important as we balance growth, resilience, and pace,
ensuring we can respond quickly to opportunities as the market evolves.
We entered 2026 as a modern mutual with strong delivery momentum and
a fabulous team having delivered significant change and progress. By
remaining disciplined, investing wisely and keeping members at the heart of
our decisions, we are well positioned to achieve sustainable, long-term
growth.
I would like to finish as I started, by thanking our members for their support
and trust, and our colleagues for the exceptional commitment they provide
every day.
Sue Hayes
Chief Executive Officer
4
th
March 2026
Page | 8 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Strategic Report
Our blueprint for the future
In 2025 we undertook a further full strategic review to ensure the strategy
we set in 2022 was still relevant. It has served us well with sector leading
growth and with increasing financial margins for new mortgage business
however with a changing world we wanted to ensure it was still the right one
for the next few years. We concluded it continues to be the right strategy,
supporting the delivery of the best outcomes for members.
The need for strategic clarity has become more critical in the face of
economic challenges, marked in recent years by higher inflation and interest
rates.
These challenges have been compounded by global instability,
including the ongoing war in Ukraine, as well as the emerging conflict in Iran,
which risks spilling over into a wider regional confrontation. Together, these
developments disrupt supply chains, drive volatility in global energy markets
and intensify wider economic uncertainty.
Building societies are the original purpose‑led financial services
organisations, and our 2025 strategic review reaffirmed the importance of
remaining anchored to that purpose. While the strategy established in 2022
continues to serve us well, redefining and clarifying our purpose ensures we
remain focused and resilient, enabling us to keep delivering meaningful value
for members despite the significant shifts in the economic and geopolitical
landscape
We have continued with our strategic blueprint that consists of three
elements:
• Our purpose - the role we play in our members’ lives;
• Our strategic drivers - what we need to prioritise; and
• Our behaviours - how we all need to operate.
Our purpose
We know home ownership is a life changing milestone, with the potential to
provide happiness, security and opportunity for generations to come. Whilst
we have been helping people buy houses for over 175 years, we know that
home ownership is becoming increasingly difficult for significant parts of the
population and as a Society we want to be there to support people to achieve
this milestone.
We also recognise that treating traditional borrowers in a consistent and fair
way is something that we and the mainstream banks can do well. This has
meant that those audiences are well catered for by mainstream banks who
operate at scale and building societies therefore need to compete on service
and differentiation. We are focused on supporting people who want to buy
their own homes but find it hard to get onto the housing ladder because they
don’t have regular monthly incomes or have hit bumps in the road but are
fundamentally good financial risks. This Extra Ordinary group has grown
significantly over the last few years and so offers a real opportunity for us to
meet the true mutual purpose and to pay our savers appropriate rates for
supplying the funding to help them. As a result, our purpose continues to be:
“Together we fight for the Extra Ordinary to own their own home.”
We define Extra Ordinary as hard-working people with circumstances that
many lenders might view as out of the ordinary - from self-employed
professionals to those who have had a setback in their career or financial
history. We believe this community has a right to be understood and that
their needs and circumstances are known so they can achieve their dream of
owning a home. This is something that is worth us all fighting for and we
commit to going the extra mile to do this.
This purpose lives at the core of our blueprint for the future. To support
delivery of this, we have also given clear direction of what we need to do to
deliver this through our strategic drivers and the behaviours our team needs
to embrace.
Our strategic drivers
To achieve our purpose, our decisions will be driven by these strategic drivers:
• Mighty Foundations - the right foundations for our business are in place. The
processes, governance, people and technology will underpin our Society to
ensure we are strong and resilient now and in the future;
• Extra Ordinary Depth - to help our members and partners including brokers, we
must build a deep and ongoing understanding of them and their circumstances.
A journey of deep listening, learning and adjusting using internal and external
data to help us;
• Purposeful Innovation - we want to create and deliver leading propositions and
member experiences that will support long term sustainable advantage to lead in
these markets and to enable us to deliver our purpose; and
• 10X Allies - we want our allies to be crucial partners who are passionate about
our purpose and work with us to accelerate and multiply the impacts we can
make. We want to create a movement of people who are on the journey with us
to help more and more people own their own home. We demonstrate this in both
the way we partner with people and the 100% intermediary led approach we take
for lending.
Our behaviours
As a mutual, it is in our DNA to understand the power of working together and
we know our purpose cannot be achieved in isolation. We will identify the
partners and like-minded allies that will join us in pursuit of our purpose. This
includes our saving community who are integral to the movement that will enable
home ownership for thousands of people every year. It also includes our
colleagues, and through our behaviours we will build a culture where our purpose
can be realised.
We encourage them to:
• Have the brave conversation - we create an environment where people feel
confident to speak up and challenge with the intent to support ongoing
improvements in what we do and how we do it;
• Make the bold leap - we take action. We lean into the change and drive it
forward, challenging the status quo to continuously make things better; and
• Seek the big insight - we demonstrate curiosity, leaving no stone unturned
to find different perspectives and to understand problems and opportunities
equally.
Page | 9 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Strategic Report
Business model and Group strategy
NBS is a Top Ten UK building society with Total Assets in excess of £5bn. The
Society operates under three membership hubs:
• Mortgages - via our intermediary-led lending hub, offering a wide variety
of mortgages and more recently through our partnership with Gen H;
• Branches - via our regional presence of 31 locations across 8 counties; and
• Digital - our online platform and mobile app, providing access to digital
savings accounts.
Mortgages
Building on our 2024 progress, we continued to expand into new niche
market segments, including tailored solutions for foreign nationals seeking
to purchase property in the UK. As our technology, data insights, and
underwriting expertise evolve, we expect to serve a growing number of
members whose lifestyle, employment, or financial circumstances require a
more personalised lending approach.
In 2025, we successfully launched our Inviting Difference In (‘IDI’) Broker
Portal in July, which has supported the majority of processed mortgage
applications since implementation. This is already transforming our lending
operations by reducing time to offer, improving decisioning capability and
significantly enhancing broker experience, marking a key milestone in our
evolution as a specialist residential lender and positioning us strongly as we
scale further into specialist segments in 2026.
Branches
We provide traditional branch services to serve those who prefer face-to-
face propositions, offering branch-based savings accounts alongside financial
planning for those that would like those services. Our colleagues strive to
provide members with an excellent member service and ensure their
financial needs are met as well as serve their local communities.
Digital
The NBS app, is the Society’s online and mobile app proposition providing
savings accounts to members who prefer to manage their savings
themselves, but also supported by our online web chat and telephony
member advocates. This also allows us to support a wider range of needs and
of locations.
The digital membership hub offers several tax-free and taxable savings
products and provides several advice partnerships, accessible on the
platform, to help first-time buyers achieve their home purchase goals
including access to mortgage advice, conveyancing services and ways to help
manage and improve their credit scores.
Overall business performance
The Group’s business activities are focused within the UK and predominantly
relate to mortgage lending which is funded through a mixture of retail
domestic deposits and wholesale funding. Both the Chair’s Statement and
Chief Executive’s Review included a summary of factors affecting our
performance in 2025 and should be read in conjunction with this report.
The economic environment in the UK remained challenging across 2025.
Throughout this period of economic instability, we have continued to deliver
on our purpose and stay focused on the long-term sustainability of the
Society, whilst balancing the interests of both savings and mortgage
members throughout.
Throughout the year, we continued to serve our members with a range of
mortgage products. While the mortgage market began the year subdued due
to higher interest rates and cost-of-living pressures, these challenges
gradually eased during 2025; however, demand remained lower than historic
levels and competitive pressures continued to compound. Nevertheless,
against this backdrop we have sustained a total asset position of £5.4bn
(2024: £5.2bn), supported by organic and inorganic mortgage lending.
Our savings members are of utmost importance to the delivery of our strategy as
their deposits support borrowers achieve their goal of home ownership. We
remain committed to providing savers with secure propositions that offer easy
access to their savings and competitive interest rates. We have maintained our
network at 31 branches, whilst expanding and improving our online digital
proposition to ensure an excellent experience for our members when accessing
their savings through their preferred channel.
Overall financial performance
This section is presented on a Group basis only and primarily reflects the
consolidated results of Nottingham Building Society and its two subsidiaries,
Arrow Mortgage Finance No.1 Ltd and Lace Funding 2025‑1 PLC. Management
assesses the Group’s financial performance at this consolidated level, which is
appropriate given the relatively straightforward structure of the Group.
Our financial performance is reviewed regularly by the Board using a range of
measures, including statutory profit before tax and underlying profit before tax.
Underlying profit represents an alternative performance measure that excludes
items such as fair value volatility and significant one-off charges which do not
reflect the Group’s core operating activities. The Board considers underlying
profit before tax to be a more representative measure of the underlying
performance of the business.
The presentation of underlying profit before tax remains consistent with prior
years. Further detail is provided within this Strategic Report, including a
reconciliation of underlying profit to statutory profit on Page 10.
Page | 10 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Strategic Report
KEY PERFORMANCE INDICATORS
Total Group basis
Gross new lending
£883m
2024: £1,215m
Total mortgage assets
£4.3bn
2024: £4.2bn
ECL coverage ratio
11bps
2024: 12bps
Total savings balance
£4.6bn
2024: £4.4bn
Interest paid to savers
£164.3m
2024: £154.6m
Net interest margin
1.62%
2024: 1.72%
Cost to income ratio
78.2%
2024: 72.7%
Profit before tax
£16.7m
2024: £13.9m
Underlying profit before tax
£20.9m
2024: £22.8m
CET1 ratio
14.1%
2024: 13.7%
Leverage ratio
5.1%
2024: 4.9%
Average LCR
236%
2024: 172%
Financial highlights
As a mutual organisation, we do not pay dividends to external shareholders;
our profit requirements are driven by the need to maintain strong capital to
support our activities. This ensures resilience against severe economic
stresses and enables continued investment to help more members in the
future.
In 2025, the key financial highlights included:
• Statutory profit before tax of £16.7m (2024: £13.9m), reflecting
disciplined margin management and strategic cost investment;
• Underlying profit before tax decreased to £20.9m (2024: £22.8m), driven
by income growth offset by higher operating costs;
• Interest receivable and similar income increased to £289.6m (2024:
£267.3m), supported by mortgage balance growth in recent years, while
NIM reduced to 1.62% (2024: 1.72%) due to rising funding costs;
• Gross mortgage balances remained broadly stable at £4.3bn (2024:
£4.2bn), with member deposit balances also steady at £4.6bn (2024:
£4.4bn);
• Cost-to-income ratio of 78.2% (2024: 72.7%) and underlying cost-to-
income ratio increased to 76.4% (2024: 73.0%), as cost growth outpaced
net interest income;
• Underlying management expenses rose to £66.5m, an increase of £4.8m
versus 2024, largely reflecting higher people costs and investment in
brand and transformation programmes;
• A £0.4m impairment provision credit was recognised (2024: £nil), resulting
in a provision balance of £4.6m (2024: £5.2m), driven by sustained low
arrears and an improving macroeconomic outlook, despite ongoing
affordability pressures; and
• Common Equity Tier 1 (‘CET1’) and Leverage Ratio increased to 14.1% and
5.1% respectively (2024: 13.7% and 4.9%), primarily due to an increase in
CET1 capital.
The results have been prepared in accordance with UK-adopted
International Financial Reporting Standards (‘IFRS’), as set out in Note 1 to
the Financial Statements. Underlying results are presented opposite,
together with a reconciliation to statutory results.
Income Statement review
INCOME STATEMENT
TOTAL GROUP BASIS
Group
2025
£m
Group
2024
£m
Net interest income
86.7
83.6
Net fees and commissions receivable
0.3
0.9
Net income
87.0
84.5
Underlying management expenses
(66.5)
(61.7)
Impairment credit on loans and advances to members
0.4
-
Underlying profit before tax
20.9
22.8
(Losses) / gains from derivative financial instruments
(3.0)
3.9
Voluntary payment expense associated with Philips
Trust Corporation
0.4
(11.2)
Recoveries against Philips Trust Corporation expense
0.1
1.0
Movement in Equity Investment Fair Value
(1.1)
-
Net strategic investment costs
(1.4)
(2.6)
Profit on disposal of freehold land and buildings 0.8
-
Profit before tax
16.7
13.9
Profitability
In 2025, the Group delivered a statutory profit before tax of £16.7m (2024:
£13.9m) and an underlying profit before tax of £20.9m (2024: £22.8m). The
reduction in underlying profit primarily reflects an increase in management
expenses, driven by continued investment in people and transformation
activities, alongside higher Gen H fees. Net interest income increased during
the year, supported by mortgage book growth in recent years and
disciplined margin management, which helped offset the impact of rising
funding costs.
On a statutory basis, profit in 2025 was impacted by losses on derivative
financial instruments, compared to gains in the prior year. Profitability in
2024 was also affected by the proactive and voluntary support provided in
relation to issues surrounding PTC.
Profit after tax remains our primary source of new capital and is essential to
ensuring long-term security for members and meeting regulatory capital
requirements. We continue to operate from a position of financial strength,
adopting a prudent approach to safeguard the interests of our members,
colleagues and the communities we serve.
Page | 11 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Strategic Report
Total Income and Net Interest Margin
2025
2024
Net Interest Margin
1.62%
1.72%
Statutory net interest income was £86.7m (2024: £83.6m), representing an
increase of £3.1m year-on-year. This growth reflects higher income levels,
alongside a reduction in NIM to 1.62% (2024: 1.72%) due to rising funding
costs.
The reduction in NIM is primarily attributable to increased funding costs, as
maturing fixed-term deposits continued to reprice at higher rates
throughout 2025. In addition, the Society’s liability hedging strategy,
resulted in higher interest payable during the year but provides protection
against potential future reductions in interest rates.
The average rate paid to our savers exceeded the market average by 53bps
(2024: 49bps), rewarding members with an additional £23.2m in interest
(2024: £19.0m). Savings rates increased in response to a competitive market
and higher average interest rates, supported by additional savings balances
to fund growth and enable repayment of funding received through the
TFSME. The Society remains committed to rewarding depositors
appropriately and continues to offer competitive rates to members.
Other Income
Net fees and commissions receivable comprise fees, commissions and other
operating income generated from the Group’s activities. These reduced
during the year, primarily due to our decision to reduce mortgage
redemption fees to £nil.
Management Expenses
The Group’s management expenses include administrative costs,
depreciation and amortisation, and strategic investment expenditure. A
breakdown is provided below:
2025
£m
2024
£m
Underlying administrative expenses
61.7
56.8
Depreciation and amortisation – underlying
4.8
4.9
Management expenses – underlying
66.5
61.7
Strategic investment costs
1.4
2.6
Total management expenses
67.9
64.3
Represents:
Administrative expenses
63.1
59.4
Depreciation & amortisation
4.8
4.9
67.9
64.3
Management expenses have risen due to ongoing investment in both
technology and people to support the Society in achieving its strategic goals.
We continue to invest in a multi-year transformation programme to
improve the experience for our members. We have focused on operating
the Society efficiently with close control over our costs and associated ratios
which remain important measures as we work to deliver our strategy.
As a result of these investments, management expenses have increased by
5.7%, with underlying management expenses increasing by 7.8% compared
to the prior year. We continue to manage our costs carefully in line with
internal targets and are continuously looking to identify appropriate
efficiencies, whilst at the same time investing for the long-term future of
the Society.
Impact of Philips Trust Corporation
In 2024, the Society incurred net expenditure of £10.2m, reflecting
voluntary payments to impacted members, net of recoveries. Further
details are provided in Note 27 to the Financial Statements.
Strategic Investment Costs
Strategic investment costs totalled £1.4m (2024: £2.6m) and primarily
relate to planned organisational changes linked to the development of the
Society’s target operating model, including staff-related measures and
other directly attributable expenditure necessary to position the
organisation for future growth. Further details are provided in Note 27 to
the Financial Statements.
Movement in Equity Investment Fair Value
The £1.1m reduction in equity investment fair value to £nil reflects an
updated assessment of the Gen H investment valuation, resulting in a
prudent downward adjustment to the carrying amount. Gen H is an
early‑stage fintech mortgage startup, and the updated valuation
incorporates the impact of dilution arising from a recent share issuance,
together with the inherent uncertainty associated with businesses at this
stage of development.
(Losses) / gains from derivative financial instruments
The Society utilises derivative financial instruments to manage interest rate
risk arising from fixed-rate mortgage, treasury assets and savings accounts,
applying hedge accounting where possible. Movements in fair value
primarily reflect timing differences, which typically reverse as the
underlying asset or liability reaches maturity.
During the year, fair value losses totalled £3.0m (2024: gains of £3.9m),
comprising:
2025
£m
2024
£m
Fair value movements on swaps held against the
mortgage pipeline
(0.1)
2.1
Amortisation gains from the reversal of losses recognised
in both the prior and current periods
0.9
0.8
Movements in the ineffectiveness of the hedge
accounting portfolio
(3.6)
0.8
Fair value movements on swaps associated with the
secured funding vehicle
(0.2)
0.2
(Losses) / gains from derivative financial instruments
(3.0)
3.9
More detail on the fair value gains and losses in the period is available in
Note 5.
Impairment Credit on Loans and Advances to Members
The Society maintains provisions for expected credit losses across all loans,
based on the probability of default and potential loss, taking into account a
range of assumptions about future economic scenarios and whether credit
risk has increased significantly since origination.
Despite ongoing affordability pressures, borrower resilience remains
strong, with the proportion of accounts in arrears by 30 days or more at
0.75% as at 31
st
December 2025 (December 2024: 0.55%).
An impairment credit of £0.4m was recognised in 2025 (2024: £nil),
reflecting an improved macroeconomic outlook and resulting in a slightly
lower coverage ratio of 0.11% (2024: 0.12%). Total impairment provisions
at 31
st
December 2025 stood at £4.5m (December 2024: £5.2m).
The Society’s cost of risk for the year was (0.01)%, broadly stable year on
year (2024: 0.0%). This favourable cost of risk reflects the net impairment
credit recognised in the period, driven by the release of provisions following
an improved forward‑looking economic outlook. The metric continues to
indicate strong underlying credit performance, with losses remaining low
relative to the size and risk profile of the mortgage book.
Further details on the key judgements and estimates involved in calculating
impairment provisions, including the use of Post-Model Adjustments,
(‘PMA’) are provided in Note 15 to the Financial Statements.
Taxation
The tax charge for the year was £6.0m (2024: £4.6m), reflecting the higher
level of profitability within the Society as a standalone entity. Further details
are provided in Note 8 to the Financial Statements.
We manage our tax obligations to ensure full compliance with all statutory
requirements and do not intentionally structure transactions to achieve a
tax outcome contrary to the intentions of Parliament. The Society maintains
an open and transparent relationship with His Majesty’s Revenue and
Customs (‘HMRC’), and our Tax Policy is reviewed annually by the Board
Audit Committee (‘BAC’). This policy provides a framework for the
operation, planning, and oversight of tax and tax risk, ensuring compliance
with relevant legislation. The policy has been adhered to throughout the
year.
Page | 12 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Strategic Report
Statement of Other Comprehensive Income
review
The Defined Benefit Pension Scheme’s liabilities are effectively hedged by
the scheme’s assets, reflecting the robust hedging strategy implemented by
the Society. This approach ensures that movements in liabilities are largely
offset by corresponding movements in assets. This can be observed in both
2025 and 2024, where gains or losses on the scheme’s liabilities have been
appropriately counterbalanced by losses or gains on the scheme’s assets,
minimising volatility in the overall funding position.
Statement of Financial Position review
Group
2025
£m
Group
2024
£m
Loans and advances to members
4,305.0
4,201.8
Liquid assets
1,071.1
917.0
Other assets
60.2
107.9
TOTAL ASSETS
5,436.3
5,226.7
Retail & wholesale funding
5,096.7
4,908.3
Other liabilities
72.9
65.1
Reserves
266.7
253.3
TOTAL LIABILITIES & RESERVES
5,436.3
5,226.7
The Society provides residential mortgages across the UK through a network
of approved mortgage intermediaries. Mortgage lending is primarily funded
by members’ savings, offered through a range of competitive channels. The
remainder is sourced from wholesale markets and other financial
institutions, including Central Bank facilities, secured on competitive terms.
This diversified funding approach supports balance sheet resilience and
ensures continued capacity to meet member needs.
Mortgage lending
Gross balances
2025
£m
2024
£m
Residential mortgages 3,569.9 3,650.3
Secured business lending 716.8 589.5
Total
4,286.7
4,239.8
Total gross mortgage balances closed the year at £4.3bn (2024: £4.2bn). Net
lending was £46.9m (2024: £647.4m). While balance growth of 18% in the
prior year was driven by increased exposure to owner-occupied residential
mortgages through both organic and inorganic channels, in 2025 we made
a deliberate decision to moderate growth to 1.1%, focusing on embedding
significant investments in systems, processes and capabilities to strengthen
long-term resilience.
Residential mortgage balances, including owner-occupied and traditional
Buy-to-Let (‘BTL’), decreased to £3.6bn (2024: £3.7bn), while Secured
Business Lending (‘SBL’) balances, including commercial lending and
portfolio BTL, increased to £0.7bn (2024: £0.6bn). BTL remains an important
part of our lending mix, complementing our core focus on supporting
extraordinary borrowers, balancing risk and enhancing financial resilience.
We recognise the vital role of quality rental housing as a stepping stone to
homeownership. The Society is also executing a planned exit from the
commercial segment.
Our lending policy continues to strike a balance between supporting
homeownership and safeguarding borrowers and the Society. In 2025, we
maintained this approach while enhancing lending through optimised
scorecards and strategies within our risk appetite. Average loan-to-value
(‘LTV’) for new lending was 70.0% for Residential and 63.7% for BTL (2024:
69.7% and 61.0%), with overall book indexed LTV at 53.0% and 49.7%,
respectively (2024: 52.4% and 50.0%).
The mortgage portfolio is well distributed throughout England and Wales
and is predominantly focused in the three broad areas of East Midlands,
Yorkshire & Humberside and London & South-East.
Retail and wholesale funding
The Society funds its mortgages through a combination of retail savings and
wholesale funds.
Gross balances
2025
£m
2024
£m
Branch savings
3,498.3
3,188.4
Non-branch savings
1,132.9
1,162.1
Retail savings
4,631.2
4,350.5
Secured wholesale
409.0
494.5
Unsecured wholesale
56.5
45.4
Collateral liabilities
-
17.9
Retail & Wholesale funding
5,096.7
4,908.3
The Society operates a diverse funding strategy to maintain an optimal mix
and duration of retail and wholesale funding. Retail savings remain the
cornerstone of our funding model, complemented by secured and
unsecured wholesale funding sourced from financial institutions and capital
markets.
As a mutual, we are committed to providing savers with a secure home for
their deposits, offering competitive products through both online channels
and our branch network, which continues to play a vital role in our strategy.
Savings balances closed the year at £4.6bn (2024: £4.4bn), supported by
market-leading rates offered during 2025. In a challenging environment, we
aim to reward members with attractive rates while prudently managing
current and future financial risks.
Total wholesale funding at 31
st
December 2025 was £0.5bn (2024: £0.6bn),
representing 9.1% (2024: 11.4%) of total funding. The movement reflects a
£180m early repayment of BoE TFSME drawings ahead of contractual
maturity, alongside the Society’s debut RMBS issuance of £350m.
Subsequent events
Subsequent to the year end, Anthony Murphy resigned from his position as
the Society’s CFO. He will continue to stand for re‑election and remain in
post until his planned departure in May 2026.
There have been no other material events after the Balance Sheet date that
would require adjustment to, or disclosure in, these Annual Report and
Accounts. The Society continues to monitor developments in the economic
and regulatory environment to ensure any emerging risks or opportunities
are appropriately addressed.
Liquid assets
NBS maintains a prudent level of high-quality liquid resources to meet its
financial obligations as they fall due under both normal and stressed
conditions. This is reflected in a strong Liquid Asset Ratio of 21.0% at 31
st
December 2025 (2024: 18.7%).
Liquidity requirements are monitored closely, incorporating forecasted and
stressed outflows on a dynamic basis. The Society’s liquidity position
remains robust, providing both protection and flexibility in an uncertain
economic environment.
The Group’s liquidity resources comprise a combination of on-balance sheet
liquid assets and access to contingent funding from the Bank of England,
secured against approved mortgage portfolios. By holding liquid resources
of the highest quality, which can be readily converted into cash, the Group
is able to manage liquidity efficiently.
The composition of On-Balance Sheet liquidity is as follows:
2025
£m
2024
£m
Balances held with the Bank of England
297.0
443.3
Multilateral Development Banks
131.5
60.4
UK Gilts & T-Bills
244.6
109.8
Mortgage-backed securities
129.1
70.3
Covered Bonds
199.6
159.4
Other
69.3
73.8
Liquid assets
1,071.1
917.0
Page | 13 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Strategic Report
At 31
st
December 2025, the Society’s liquidity included £1.1 billion of High-
Quality Liquid Assets (‘HQLA’) (2024: £0.9 billion), comprising cash or assets
readily realisable as cash when required. 100% of our liquidity portfolio was
rated A or above (2024: 100%), reflecting our commitment to maintaining a
high-quality liquidity position.
Liquidity is monitored by the PRA under the Capital Requirements
Regulation (‘CRR’) framework, with the Liquidity Coverage Ratio (‘LCR’)
being the primary measure. The Society remained comfortably above the
regulatory minimum throughout the year, reporting weighted-average LCR
of 236% for 2025 (2024: 172%).
Capital
The Society remains focused on maintaining strong capital ratios to protect
members’ interests, with all regulatory capital requirements comfortably
exceeded throughout the year.
Our regulatory capital primarily comprises accumulated retained profits
within the general reserve and subscribed capital provided through
Permanent Interest-Bearing Shares (‘PIBS’). Capital serves as a vital buffer
against unexpected losses, safeguarding depositors and other creditors.
The Regulator requires the Society to hold a minimum level of capital
against its assets, known as the Total Capital Requirement (‘TCR’). As at 31
st
December 2025, the TCR was set at 8.4% (2024: 8.4%) of Risk Weighted
Assets (‘RWAs’), equivalent to £152.9m (2024: £151.2m).
Total regulatory capital increased by £10.1m during 2025 to £278.6m (2024:
£268.5m), primarily driven by retained profits added to the general reserve.
Growth in the mortgage book resulted in RWAs increasing by £20.9m during
the year. Consequently, the Common Equity Tier 1 (‘CET1’) ratio, increased
to 14.1% (2024: 13.7%).
The composition of regulatory capital as at 31
st
December is shown below:
2025
2024
Transitional
CRD
Transitional
CRD
CAPITAL RESOURCES £m £m
COMMON EQUITY TIER 1 CAPITAL
General reserves
264.0
253.2
Revaluation reserve
2.7
-
Fair value reserves
-
0.1
Regulatory adjustments & deductions
(12.0)
(8.7)
TOTAL COMMON EQUITY TIER 1 CAPITAL 254.7 244.6
TOTAL ADDITIONAL TIER 1 CAPITAL
-
-
TIER 2 CAPITAL
Permanent Interest Bearing Shares
23.9
23.9
TOTAL TIER 2 CAPITAL
23.9
23.9
TOTAL REGULATORY CAPITAL 278.6 268.5
RISK WEIGHTED ASSETS
1,811.3
1,790.4
CAPITAL RATIOS
%
%
Common Equity Tier 1 (‘CET1’) ratio
14.1
13.7
Total Tier 1 ratio
14.1
13.7
Total Capital ratio
15.4
15.0
Leverage ratio
5.1
4.9
Capital requirements
• The Society maintains a robust capital framework to ensure resilience
and compliance with regulatory standards, while adapting to an
evolving regulatory environment. Our capital requirements comprise
the following components: Pillar 1 – capital held to meet minimum
requirements for credit risk, operational risk, and market risk.
• Pillar 2A – Additional capital required by the PRA to cover risks not
captured under Pillar 1. At 31
st
December 2025, this requirement was
0.4% of RWAs, representing a point-in-time assessment by the PRA.
• Capital Buffers – we hold capital buffers designed to absorb the impact
of stress scenarios, including:
- A sector-wide Capital Conservation Buffer of 2.5%;
- A Countercyclical Capital Buffer, currently set at 2.0% of RWAs for UK
exposures; and
- Additional requirements determined through the Internal Capital
Adequacy Assessment Process (‘ICAAP’) to ensure alignment with our
risk appetite and capacity to withstand severe but plausible stress
scenarios.
The ICAAP is reviewed by the PRA when setting the Society’s Total Capital
Requirement (Pillar 1 and Pillar 2A). We conduct regular stress testing on our
capital base, which consistently demonstrates a surplus above regulatory
requirements after applying management actions.
The Leverage Ratio, calculated as Tier 1 capital divided by total balance sheet
exposure, increased to 5.1%. This increase primarily reflects growth in capital
in excess of growth in asset exposures.
Further details on the Society’s capital management approach can be found in
our Pillar 3 Report, available at https://www.thenottingham.com.
Risks and uncertainties
The Society continues to identify new or evolving risks through its Risk
Management Framework (‘RMF’). Looking ahead, and taking note of the
external environment, the Society is conscious of economic uncertainties and
other horizon risks. Continued pressure on cost-of-living in the UK, with a
continuing period of heightened inflation, two consecutive tax-raising budgets,
conflicts in Ukraine and Iran, as well as the continued volatile interest rate
environment, give rise to a number of risks and uncertainties. Added to this,
the ever-competitive trading environment, the increasing rate of change of
technology, and the continued evolution of the regulatory environment, give
rise to further challenges which must be navigated in the pursuit of the
Society’s strategy.
Economic uncertainties
The BoE has continued to reduce the Bank Rate over time; however, early
reductions in inflation have somewhat stalled. Offsetting this, wage growth has
continued and cost-of-living pressures for UK homeowners seem to have
somewhat ceased. The Society continues to be mindful of the effect of
sustained higher inflation on credit risk in retail mortgage portfolios.
The reducing interest rate environment does, however, give rise to downside
risks of margin compression, and market risks due to uncertainty around the
quantum and timing of rate changes.
In addition, heightened geopolitical uncertainty continues, with wars in Ukraine
and Iran giving rise to significant global economic risks. This, added to changes
in the foreign policy posture of the US under the current administration and US
economic policy (a more protectionist stance, tariffs etc), gives rise to
significant economic uncertainty.
Domestically, the UK government has delivered its second Budget, with some
significant changes, the economic impact of which have yet to be seen. In
particular, changes to salary sacrifice rules for pension contributions, the cut to
the cash ISA limit, and the so-called ‘mansion tax’ could each have second-
order impacts on demand in this sector.
While changes to fiscal policy do give rise to some uncertainty, the government
continues to deliver positive messages on its support of the mutual sector and
financial services more broadly, seeing the sector as a key driver of its growth
agenda going forward.
As always, the Society remains mindful of these sources of economic
uncertainty, and it continues to maintain significant surpluses of financial
resources, both capital and liquidity, to navigate through any turbulence. The
Society has historically had low levels of arrears and defaults, and its mortgage
book has proved extremely resilient during economic turbulence over the past
several years.
The Society remains ever vigilant, and undertakes regular stress-testing,
conducts an ICAAP, regularly assesses the levels of provisions held against bad
debts and sets a capital appetite requirement at a level that is designed to be
more than adequate to absorb credit losses should they arise. The Society
maintains a capital position in excess of its regulatory capital requirement.
Lending decision-making is supported by models which are reviewed regularly
and overseen as part of the governance framework to ensure they remain
relevant in an uncertain macroeconomic environment. The Society will
continue to take a prudent approach both in its assessment of house prices and
in its forecast of arrears levels.
NBS will also continue to monitor closely all relevant economic forecasts to
ensure that all emerging risks and shifts in dynamics are considered.
Page | 14 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Strategic Report
Trading environment
Trading conditions continue to be challenging as the mortgages and savings
markets remain highly competitive.
On the mortgages side, the Society’s strategy and business plan is seeking
to increase margin, while growing the Balance Sheet, the combination of
which is only possible by identifying and catering for underserved niches in
the market. NBS has been successful in this regard in recent years, having
significantly grown its Balance Sheet while delivering strong lending margins
on new business. However, to maintain this trajectory, the Society will need
to continue to innovate and develop its underlying capabilities in credit
decisioning, operations and technology more broadly.
On the savings side, as rates continue to fall, there is a risk of margin
compression, and the retail savings market continues to be highly
competitive.
Noting the challenges of this environment, the Society continues to make
developments in several areas that should help to offset some of these risks.
NBS continues to enhance digital and branch propositions under the unified
Nottingham Building Society brand with enhancements to functionality and
customer experience anticipated to provide some differentiation and
benefit on the savings side, with improved capabilities around proposition
development and pricing continuing to provide benefit on the lending side.
Strategy risk
As the Society continues on its journey to modernise its capabilities,
proposition and enhance its model to build a sustainable business for the
long-term, there continue to be risks to the delivery of this vision.
The Society is particularly focused on the risk that we do not realise the
lending margins anticipated in the plan, that cost of funds is higher than we
anticipate, that costs related to transformation are higher than anticipated.
With these risks in mind, the Society has clear guidelines within which the
business is required to operate to ensure that any deviations from expected
outcomes are identified early and addressed. These guidelines ensure that
as we grow and transform the business, we are doing so in a measured,
deliberate and stable manner.
Funding risk
Volatile markets and elevated interest rates have resulted in increases to
the cost of funds and balancing the reward of saving members with margin
management will need continued careful consideration. The elevated
interest rate environment in recent times has led to an increasingly
competitive landscape.
The Society has continued to develop its capabilities and diversify its mix of
retail and wholesale funding and delivered its debut public securitisation
transaction to the market in February 2025.
NBS possesses a diverse mix of funding options to allow it to secure retail
funding at competitive rates, including the digital capability provided by the
app, and has worked to enhance capabilities and funding options over the
past year. Liquidity is assessed as part of the Internal Liquidity Adequacy
Assessment Process (‘ILAAP’) which includes robust stress testing.
Partnerships risk
NBS works closely with key partners who provide services to members on
its behalf. As the Society explores new ways of meeting the needs of its
members, it is likely that the number of key strategic partners will continue
to increase.
The Society has existing relationships with a number of key strategic
partners who support elements of the strategy, such as a forward-flow
lending partner, lending and decisioning platform providers, a core-banking
platform provider, and infrastructure and networking providers.
NBS recognises that working with external parties requires close oversight,
and has a framework and controls in place to support this. The Society
manages such relationships through oversight, contractual requirements
and service delivery standards. Partners are monitored to ensure that their
services meet the Society’s high standards, and metrics on service delivery
are reviewed regularly and for critical suppliers reported to management
committees.
Transformation risk
The Society continues to make significant investment in its IT infrastructure,
to both enhance operational resilience and provide enhanced capability to
facilitate its strategic goals.
The inherent risks associated with technological change, including potential
business disruption and / or operational loss, will be at heightened levels
during this transformation. This has been recognised by the Society and is
being managed appropriately using a defined change framework, with
additional investment in change management capabilities, including the
appointment of several suitably experienced professionals.
Cyber risk
In tandem with the Society’s increasing digital presence, cyber security risk
continues to rank highly on the agenda and over recent years NBS has
observed an increase in the volume of external cyber-attacks. This,
combined with the increasing technological and organisational
sophistication of malicious actors, represents an increasing challenge and
threat to the business, in common with the reported experience of other
businesses across all sectors.
Work is constantly undertaken to enhance and monitor the effectiveness of
risk management in this space. The investment of resources to support this
will continue, with the support of third parties who are working closely with
the Society to ensure information security controls remain robust against
the fluid external threat environment.
NBS remains proactive and will continue to invest in its cyber capabilities as
this ‘arms race’ continues. Technical expertise is complemented with
education and awareness activities to ensure that employees are equipped
to recognise and manage the risks associated with cyber activity. The
capability to respond to and recover from cyber events is kept under
continuous review including contingency planning, crisis management and
disaster recovery plans.
Operational resilience risk
Operational resilience remains a significant focus, reflecting the important
role that the Society plays in its members’ lives and the potential impact on
members due to disruption to our services. In addition, operational
resilience remains a key regulatory focus.
NBS has worked to develop a clear understanding of its most important
business services which, if significantly disrupted, have the potential to
cause intolerable harm to its members. In parallel with broader
transformation and change activities, the Society continues to invest in
improvements to the reliability and resilience of its business services
generally, with a particular focus on those that could have a detrimental
impact to its members.
Climate change risk
Enhancement of the Society’s approach to climate-related risks continues
with greater definition around responsibility frameworks for climate risk
and metrics to monitor objectives related to carbon neutrality and Net Zero.
Risks remain around interpreting the impact of climate on the Society’s
assets and members with modelling and the sourcing of reliable data being
an industry-wide challenge.
Page | 15 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Strategic Report
Regulatory and legal risk
Several regulatory requirements are currently being delivered. Operational
Resilience continues to be a significant focus for the Society, while the
impact of incoming Basel 3.1 and associated SDDT requirements is a key
consideration for the Society.
Activities related to recent regulatory developments in areas such as
Climate Risk, Operational Resilience and Consumer Duty are enduring and
require continued dedication of resources to facilitate effective embedding,
evolution of approaches and ongoing monitoring and management.
The Society monitors the regulatory environment actively to ensure that it
can comply fully with all new and changing regulatory requirements.
Horizon scanning is a key process that supports the work of the Legal and
Regulatory Risk Committee (‘LRC’), which oversees the Society’s approach
to developing new processes in line with regulatory changes.
Anthony Murphy
Chief Financial Officer
4
th
March 2026
Page | 16 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Stakeholder Engagement Report
The Board acknowledges the variety of stakeholders we have and the significance of evaluating and comprehending their requirements. We have established
communication channels for each stakeholder group to guarantee that their perspectives are considered in the overall decision-making process.
The table below outlines our primary stakeholder groups and how we engage with them:
Stakeholder
Who they are
What is expected from us?
How do we listen and engage?
Members
• Retail borrowers
• Retail savers
• Offer mortgages that are affordable and
fairly priced;
• offer good value savings accounts;
• provide a friendly, efficient service;
• tailor help for vulnerable members; and
• support broader societal goals.
• AGM;
• member newsletter;
• member panels;
• focus groups and panels;
• Society’s website;
• face-to-face;
• telephone;
• e-mails; and
• volunteering.
Colleagues
• Colleagues
• Contractors
• Implement equitable reward and
remuneration policies;
• support a good work-life balance;
• encourage and support personal
development and training;
• foster an inclusive culture that values
diversity and celebrates it;
• prioritise the well-being of physical, mental,
and financial aspects;
• demonstrate empathy, respect, and fairness
in all interactions;
• show genuine concern for the physical,
mental, and financial well-being of
colleagues; and
• show empathy, respect, and fairness to all.
• Engagement via leadership;
• colleague surveys;
• provide engagement via leadership
teams;
• connect through colleague networks;
• keep colleagues up to date on all things
Society related; and
• data analytics and monitoring activities
on key engagement and employee value
proposition key performance indicators.
Community
• Local communities
• Charities and community
groups
• Dedicate resources to promote the economic
well-being of communities;
• actively contribute to broader societal goals;
• cultivate an inclusive culture that values and
celebrates diversity; and
• operate as a sustainable business while
embodying social responsibility.
• Advocacy on matters important to
stakeholders;
• addressing climate change,
encompassing carbon footprint
reduction and achieving Net Zero
emissions;
• supporting local community initiatives;
and
• charity donations and charity days for
staff to volunteer their time.
Partners
• Brokers
• Suppliers
• Auditors
• Industry bodies
• Investors
• Ensure ease of interaction and simplicity in
dealings;
• collaborate as trusted partners to achieve
shared success;
• provide helpful, efficient, and approachable
service; and
• take tangible steps to contribute to broader
societal goals.
• Direct engagement through specialist
teams;
• direct engagement through face-to-face
meetings and events;
• Annual Report and Accounts;
• Regulatory News Service
announcements; and
• investor reporting.
Regulators
• Central and local
governments
• PRA
• FCA
• Swiftly and proactively resolve member
issues;
• act within the law and regulations and in the
interests of our members;
• operate in line with the requirements of
Consumer Duty, ensuring products are fit-
for-purpose and represent fair value;
• be financially strong and secure by
maintaining adequate resources, including
capital and liquidity;
• act with integrity and transparency; and
•
prioritise operational resilience.
• Operate in accordance with the law and
regulations, prioritising the well-being
of our members and customers;
• quickly and pre-emptively address
member concerns; and
• ensure financial strength and security
by upholding sufficient resources,
including capital and liquidity.
Page | 17 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Corporate Responsibility Report
As a mutual building society, our commitment to making a real and lasting
difference in the communities we’re part of remains priority. That includes the
areas around our 31 branches, our Nottingham head office, and even where
our colleagues live and work. Our community support manifests in lots of
different ways - from the time our colleagues spend volunteering, to
fundraising and donating goods, as well as the financial support given to
charities and non-profit organisations to power their work.
In 2025, we invested a total of £144,511 into our communities - that’s 1.0%
of our 2024 pre-tax profit - and we’re really proud of the positive impact
that’s helped us create together. We’re also thrilled to have been a finalist in
2025’s East Midlands Business of the Year Awards, in the ‘Community
Impact’ category for our social impact work.
Our ongoing commitment to supporting people who are homeless and at
risk
Our Social Impact programme continues to focus on helping people who are
homeless or at risk of losing their home, making sure they can access both
emergency support and long-term solutions that lead to a safe and stable
place to live.
In 2025, we proudly continued our partnerships with Emmanuel House and
Shelter, supporting people in need across our city, Nottingham, through
Emmanuel House and those seeking support across England through Shelter.
In our third year of funding for each charity, we’ve supported Emmanuel
House’s accommodation provisions and Shelter’s emergency Webchat
service. Our colleagues have continued to raise funds, host donation drives
and bring awareness to each charity and the valuable work they do.
We’ve focused over the past three years to truly entwine our charitable
partnerships into the Society and one way this manifested in 2025 is through
our Management Development Programme. 23 colleagues have been
enrolled onto an accredited programme to build their leadership skills and we
challenged them to raise funds for both charities. Colleagues were split into
five groups and tasked with raising vital donations for either Emmanuel House
or Shelter over a ten-week sprint. Each given £100 for resources, the groups
had to work to come up with creative fundraising ideas, manage budgets,
write communications and work as team to deliver in the hope of being the
most fruitful fundraisers in the challenge. From physical challenges like cycling
and walking 500 miles as well as plunging into ice cold water through to
community centred events like bake sales, an in-branch Santa’s grotto and hot
chocolate stations, our teams went big with their passion to raise a combined
£108k for Emmanuel House and Shelter.
Amplifying the voice of future talent
It’s important to us to show young people in Nottingham that the city can
provide fruitful careers and that financial services hosts many career
opportunities. In 2025 we continued working with young people identified as
at risk of becoming Not in Education, Employment or Training (‘NEET’) when
they leave secondary education through the charity ThinkForward. A key
programme was Business Mentoring, where 18 colleague volunteers hosted
18 young people, for two hours per week, for six weeks. The programme aims
to build confidence, self-awareness, communication skills and equip the
students with their first CV as well as having practiced interviews in a safe,
workplace environment. Feedback from our colleague volunteers included “I
enjoyed the entire experience especially getting to know the young people a
little, seeing them grow in confidence and getting an insight into their views
and opinions”. This was our fourth year supporting the programme and we
intend to continue our support in 2026.
At the heart of our communities
Our 31 branch locations are empowered to contribute to our work with
Emmanuel House and Shelter, as well as receiving the autonomy to support
causes most important to their local area. In 2025, our branch colleagues gave
3,125 hours of volunteer time, more than ever before and 47% more than
2024.
Our teams continue to invite members and non-members in their local area
to events in branch, aimed at education, building community and charity
awareness and fundraising. As we rebrand branches, we’re considering how
each location’s design can complement these events for our local
communities.
Growing impact
Alongside our branch teams, colleagues across all locations gave working time
to charities and non-profits needing support in 2025. 48% of our colleagues
gave their working time to support non-profit organisations, which
accumulated in 3,938 hours (2024: 3,522 hours) of volunteer time. We’re
proud of the year-on-year growth we’ve seen in colleague contributions, truly
living our mutual ethos and showing up for our local communities.
As we look ahead to 2026, we are ambitious in further scaling up our Social
Impact programmes both through our charity relationships, our branch
locations and by continuing to support colleagues to have a lasting,
meaningful impact on our communities.
Building a different kind of Society
Our people define our success as a Society, so supporting them to do their best
work to benefit our customers and communities is really important to us.
Creating an inclusive workplace is a journey we remain fully committed to. In
2025, our five colleague inclusion networks played even more of a key role
with awareness, education and celebration of our differences. Collectively our
networks produced over 100 pieces of content for our intranet site, ‘Our Place’
and ran various events such as ‘SummerFest’, an in-office celebration of
culture where each network held a stall to share their progress as a group and
invite new members. They also championed ‘Boost Boxes’ sent to every
branch to celebrate National Inclusion week. Each network pulled
together a
‘must read, must watch and must listen’ recommendation list alongside an
item that represented them such as balance tea from the Hormonal Health
Hub and rainbow merchandise from our Pride network. We were proud to
sponsor Notts Pride for a second year running and even more proud to have
colleague representation double compared to 2024 attendance. We value the
opportunity to publicly stand for our colleagues and communities, no matter
someone’s personal characteristics.
Beyond our inclusion networks, in 2025 we sharpened our focus on investing
in our colleagues and their personal development. We saw an increase in
engagement with our e-learning platform, (introduced in 2024), offered 117
hours of leadership coaching and enrolled 23 colleagues onto our
Management Development programme; of which 84% are female leaders.
Ten colleagues were given memberships to Women in Banking and Finance
resources to aid their development with webinars, teaching and networking
opportunities.
We also joined Progress Together, a financial services membership
organisation that will support us to ensure we’re a socio-economic inclusive
workplace in a sector that can still be perceived as exclusive. We’re looking
forward to sharing more of this in 2026. All this activity has accumulated with
a finalist position at The Learning Awards under the category ‘Learning Impact
Award’ where the winner will be announced in 2026.
How we support the development of our colleagues and our local
communities is high on our priority list and in 2026 we will continue our
investment into both groups to further grow our impact as a Society.
Page | 18 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Sustainability Report
The Financial Stability Board created the Task Force on Climate-Related
Financial Disclosures (‘TCFD’) to improve and increase consistent reporting
of climate-related financial information. The following Sustainability Report
presents the Society’s climate-related disclosures under the TCFD
requirements.
Governance
NBS’s Board is ultimately accountable for all climate change related matters.
The Executive Committee (‘ExCo’) is responsible for deriving the Society’s
strategic response to climate change and overseeing day to day
management of climate-related activities. It provides the focal point for
climate-related decision-making and is supported by Subject Matter Experts
from across the Society. The BRC and the Executive Risk Committee (‘ERC’)
are responsible for oversight of climate-related risks.
The ExCo has ultimate responsibility for co-ordinating all climate-related
risks and assessing them collectively as part of the quarterly review of the
Strategy Risk dashboard, of which climate risk is a component. BRC (under
delegated authority from the Board) has been fully engaged with the
Society’s response to climate change.
NBS operates a ‘three lines of defence’ model for risk management, in
common with many financial sector firms. Responsibility for identifying,
managing and reporting risks, including climate-related risks, resides with
the first line of defence. The second line of defence is responsible for
providing challenge and oversight over the first line, the risks being assessed
and modelled and oversight of the reporting of them to ensure it remains
comprehensive. The third line of defence is responsible for providing
independent assurance and assessment of the impacts of climate-related
risks.
In addition, NBS has several policies and procedures in place, which define
the Society’s approach to climate change and ensure that activities are
performed consistently and in accordance with the Board’s stated
objectives and goals.
Strategy
Throughout 2025 we have targeted the reduction in our Scope 1 and 2
emissions as a priority underpinned with a commitment to reduce our
overall Stage 1 and 2 emissions by a minimum 10% over the year versus
2024. As detailed in our 2024 report this approach was agreed due to Scope
1 and 2 being more within our direct control.
During 2025 we have focused on continued deployment of various energy
efficient and emission reduction initiatives throughout the business,
through our in-house Facilities team. In recent years, temperature control
devices have been installed in our branches and we have removed all gas
boilers from our estate. Additionally, we have rolled out smart meters and
introduced passive infrared light sensors across the entire estate. Energy
infrastructure has been integrated with an energy analysis portal that allows
us to identify when we have spikes in usage, which we can then take steps
to address.
Working closely with our energy consultants and supplier base we will
continue to explore new energy efficient and emission reduction initiatives
as the market evolves with new products and technology.
Risk management
Identification
NBS recognises that climate change is far reaching across its business and
to capture all the material touchpoints, climate risk is embedded within the
Society enterprise-wide. Alongside the scenario analysis, the Society
recognises that climate risk can manifest across a broad range of areas.
NBS has eight principal risk categories and climate risk is included as a
subcategory under the Society’s Strategy Risk Principal Risk Type (‘PRT’).
This provides an elevated and centralised view of climate related risks. The
risk appetite statement states that the Society has a low-risk appetite for
not meeting the statutory requirements of climate change and our own
stated climate change related goals.
Climate change scenario analysis
The Society assesses climate change risk across two main categories.
Physical risk considers the impact of physical effects of climate change or
weather-related events such as flooding. Transitional risk assesses the
transition to a low-carbon and climate resilient future such as changes in
policy and regulation.
To ensure strategic decisions are informed appropriately, a range of
scenario analyses are performed in relation to climate change. These
included the impact of flooding across the mortgage portfolio as well as
transitional risks of an increase in minimum Energy Performance Certificate
(‘EPC’) ratings and the potential costs this could incur.
Scenario Framework and Assumptions
Scenario analysis is undertaken in line with the Bank of England’s Climate
Biennial Exploratory Scenario (‘CBES’) published in 2022. Three pathways
are assessed, each with different policy, economic and physical‑risk
assumptions:
Early policy action:
• An orderly transition, with policies introduced gradually;
• Energy prices stabilise as decarbonisation progresses smoothly;
• House prices experience limited disruption; and
• Global warming is limited to 2°C, resulting in a moderate increases in
Physical Risk.
Late policy action:
• Climate policy is delayed until 2031, prompting a more abrupt and
disorderly transition;
• A short‑term macroeconomic shock is assumed, including a fall in
property prices and higher unemployment;
• Energy costs rise more sharply due to delayed investment and
disruption; and
• Warming remains limited to 2°C, though transition impacts are more
severe.
No additional policy action:
• No further climate‑related policy intervention beyond what is already
enacted;
• Energy costs remain volatile and are assumed to increase over time;
• House prices are affected by progressively higher Physical Risk; and
• Global warming increases to around 3°C, leading to a significant rise in
the frequency and severity of climate‑related events such as flooding.
These scenarios incorporate assumptions relating to:
• Increases in borrower costs arising from energy‑efficiency
improvements (EPC upgrades) and the transition to low‑carbon
heating;
• Potential declines in collateral values where transition costs reduce
net property value or where properties face heightened physical‑risk
exposure;
• Higher credit losses where properties become “stranded” due to
either inability to meet minimum EPC standards or very high flood risk
leading to uninsurability; and
• Macroeconomic impacts, particularly in the Late Policy Action
scenario, feeding through to Probability of Defaults (‘PD’) and Loss
Given Defaults (‘LGD’).
ICAAP Conclusions
The outputs of these scenarios are used to inform the Society’s ICAAP and
are considered across the relevant risk categories within the Risk
Management Framework (‘RMF’). Based on current modelling and
assumptions, the ICAAP assessment concluded that no additional capital is
required to cover climate‑related risks.
Page | 19 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Sustainability Report
Mitigation
Informed by its Climate Risk assessment and scenario analysis, the Society
has identified key areas of focus to further strengthen its management of
climate‑related risks:
• Enhanced underwriting and monitoring: improving the identification
and ongoing reporting of properties with heightened Physical or
Transition Climate Risk;
• Refinement of Risk Appetite and Credit Policy: considering specific
limits for lending on higher‑risk properties; and
• Product development: reviewing opportunities to support members in
improving energy efficiency and transitioning to a low‑carbon
economy.
Actions
Several targets and metrics have been developed, which support the risk
appetite. These have been informed by several factors, including multiple
scenario analyses. The targets considered for 2025 include:
Short-term (1-3 years)
• Reduce Scope 1 and Scope 2 greenhouse gas emissions by 10% by the
end of 2025, relative to the 2024 baseline. This aligns with annual
business planning cycles and short‑term operational viability
assessments;
• Refinement of Risk Appetite and Credit Policy: considering the
introduction of specific limits for lending on higher‑risk properties;
and
• Product development: reviewing opportunities to support members in
improving energy efficiency and transitioning to a low‑carbon
economy.
Medium-term (3-10 years)
• Interim reduction milestones (to be confirmed through annual review
cycles) will inform strategic planning, capital investment decisions and
assessment of resilience under plausible climate transition pathways.
Long-term (10-30 years+)
• Achieve Net Zero greenhouse gas emissions across Scopes 1, 2, and
material Scope 3 categories by 2050, with annual review of short‑term
pathways. This supports long‑term strategy and viability assessments
and aligns with recognised national and international transition
pathways.
The metrics and risk appetite are formally assessed by risk oversight
committees (at least quarterly). In addition, climate-related risks are
assessed as part of the half-year forecast and corporate planning processes,
to ensure that the current assessment of climate-related risks and strategic
objectives are aligned and the activities co-ordinated.
NBS recognises that the identification, measurement and forecasting of
climate-related risks present unique challenges, not least because of the
longer-term nature of the risks, the uncertainty around when and how they
will manifest and challenges around accessing reliable data and modelling it
effectively, all of which are common, to a lesser or greater extent, to
organisations. The Society’s approach to climate change and the effective
management of associated risks will inevitably evolve, as internal and
external understanding and approaches develop.
The most material climate-related risks identified are as follows:
• Credit risk and the impact of climate change on NBS’s existing and
future lending books from both a physical and transitional risk
perspective;
• Operational risks including impacts on how the Society and its third
parties and strategic partners operate and conduct business; and
• Legal, regulatory & conduct risks arising from the need to comply with
challenge laws and regulations and the impacts of them on our
business operations.
As the most material risks, these will form the focus of the Society’s
response to climate risk management in the short-term.
Metrics and targets
Carbon Footprint
We have strengthened our relationship with our long-standing utilities
partner, Inspired Energy, during 2025 and they will continue to support us
in developing our carbon strategy. Deliverables as a direct result of our work
with Inspired are as follows:
• Quarterly assessment and reporting of our Scope 1 and 2 emissions;
• Completion of selected site surveys to understand our current
emissions and opportunities for reduction;
• Options for carbon offset projects;
• Proposal to Reduce Energy Consumption and Cost with HVAC and
Heating Controls;
• Integration of an energy analysis portal within the Estates and
Facilities team;
• Annual review of our performance against targets; and
• Completion of Energy Savings Opportunity Scheme (‘ESOS’) Phase 3.
During 2025 we set a target to reduce our Scope 1 and 2 by a minimum of
10% against 2024 full year on a consistent basis. The introduction and
implementation of various energy efficient and emission reduction
initiatives throughout the year have contributed to Scope 1 and 2 emissions
reduction by 16.5%.
We also set out to reduce our electricity usage in 2025 and have achieved a
17.5% reduction through several measures including the completion of the
rollout of temperature controls across our branch estate and the increased
analysis of our energy usage via the data portal that we now utilise, which
has supported us in taking localised actions where anomalies have been
identified.
Whilst our core objective will be to ensure that the business meets the
Government’s Net Zero target date of 2050, we will be seeking to
understand our pathway and whether we can deliver aspects ahead of that
date.
Key to that understanding has been the establishment of our Carbon
Balance Sheet, which details our emissions against Scope 1, 2 and 3. This
has been updated and we now have five years of data to support us to
monitor trends and performance against targets.
Our internal data has been married with UK Government approved BEIS
greenhouse gas emission conversion factors for calculating carbon
emissions for a range of activities and processes.
Results of the 2025 data analysis show that we continue to generate over
99.6% of our emissions due to Scope 3 which covers indirect emission
sources. Within our Scope 3 emissions over 92.1% are in relation to the
carbon generated by properties where the mortgages that we have granted
provide part of the funding, but where we do not have direct control over
the carbon neutrality or otherwise of those buildings.
In the short-term we have continued to focus on addressing on our Scope 1
and 2 emissions. We report our greenhouse gas emissions in accordance
with the Greenhouse Gas (‘GHG’) Protocol using an operational control
boundary. This means we include all emissions from activities and sources
over which we have direct operational control.
Page | 20 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Sustainability Report
The data included in our Carbon Balance Sheet, summarised in the table
below, therefore reflects our Scope 1, Scope 2 and relevant Scope 3
emissions expressed in tonnes of CO₂ equivalent:
2025
C02 in tonnes
2024
CO2 in tonnes
Scope 1 emissions
1
Direct emissions from owned or controlled sources
Gas
-
-
Other Fuels
-
-
Travel
9
8
Scope 2 emissions
2
Indirect emissions from purchased energy
Electricity
198
240
Total directly attributable
emissions
207 0.4% 248 0.5%
Scope 3 emissions
Other indirect emissions that occur in an entity’s value chain
Investments (mortgage
portfolio)
3
43,930 44,299
Purchased Goods and
Services
2,324 2,396
Capital Goods 662 392
Other
4
784
755
Total indirect emissions
47,700
99.6%
47,842
99.5%
Total emissions
47,907
48,090
CO2 per £’m of loans and
advances to members
11.1 11.4
1. Scope 1 – Direct Emissions
Scope 1 emissions are calculated using fuel consumption data measured in
litres. The methodology for both Scope 1 and Scope 2 CO₂e emissions aligns
with recognised standards, including the GHG Protocol (Corporate Standard
and Scope 2 Guidance), ISO 14064‑1 and ISO 14064‑2, and the UK
Environmental Reporting Guidelines.
2. Scope 2 – Indirect Energy Emissions (Location‑Based)
Scope 2 emissions are derived from electricity consumption as evidenced by
electricity invoices. The location‑based method is applied, using average
grid emissions intensity factors for the region where the electricity is
consumed. Emission calculations use the UK Government Emissions Factor
Database 2025, incorporating the published gross calorific values (kWh) and
associated CO₂e emission factors.
3. Scope 3 – Indirect Value Chain Emissions (Market‑Based Electricity)
Scope 3 emissions include those associated with electricity consumption
calculated using the market‑based method. This approach reflects
emissions from electricity products that the organisation has chosen (or not
chosen), drawing on emission factors derived from contractual instruments
such as bundled energy‑attribute contracts or unbundled attribute claims.
Market‑based emissions are reported in tonnes of CO₂. For this report,
market‑based emissions have been calculated using REGO‑backed
electricity contract emission factors.
4. Other Scope 3 Categories
The “Other” category includes emissions arising from business travel
(including grey fleet), employee commuting, and leased assets.
Physical risk metrics
Flood risk
Key metrics of physical risk are potential surface water risk, river and sea
flood risk. This is assessed based on publicly available flood risk data
published by the Environment Agency. The data below categorises our
mortgage exposures by annual flood probability as at 31
st
December 2025
and 2024:
Balance by annual flood probability
31
st
December 2025
Total
£m
%
High
(>3.3%)
45.5
1.06
Medium
(>1.1%-3.3%)
63.4
1.48
Low
(0.1%-1.1%)
87.9
2.05
Negligible
(<0.1%)
4,006.6
93.47
Unable to categorise
N/A
83.3
1.94
Total
4,286.7 100
Balance by annual flood probability
31
st
December 2024
Total
£m
%
High
(>3.3%)
89.5
2.11
Medium
(>1.1%-3.3%)
111.5
2.63
Low
(0.1%-1.1%)
505.4
11.92
Negligible
(<0.1%)
3,428.8
80.87
Unable to categorise
N/A
104.7
2.47
Total
4,239.8 100
Subsidence risk
Our exposure to high-risk subsidence areas remains low, consistent with
previous assessments. This reflects our prudent approach to property risk
management, which considers factors such as geological conditions,
historical claims data, and underwriting controls. We continue to monitor
this risk closely and will integrate any relevant insights into future
assessments to ensure a comprehensive understanding of our portfolio's
resilience.
Transitional risk metrics
As part of understanding transition risks, The Society’s lending portfolio has
been broken down by EPC rating. This will also allow the Society to work
closely with its members to help manage any impact as potential policy and
regulatory changes occur. The table below reflects current EPC ratings taken
from the England and Wales EPC register across the Residential and BTL
portfolios (including Ltd Co BTL).
Energy Performance Certificate Data
As at 31
st
December 2025
Number
Exposure
£m
EPC Rating A-C
7,631
1,391.0
EPC Rating D-E
12,181
2,019.0
EPC Rating below E
991
168.0
No EPC available
4,197
708.7
Total
25,000
4,286.7
Energy Performance Certificate Data
As at 31
st
December 2024
Number
Exposure
£m
EPC Rating A-C
7,436
1,211.0
EPC Rating D-E
12,236
1,808.5
EPC Rating below E
859
138.2
No EPC available
5,148
1,082.1
Total
25,679
4,239.8
EPC data provides an understanding of the energy efficiency of properties,
with an A rating denoting the most energy efficient. This information also
informs the Society’s scenario analysis for transitional risks.
Page | 21 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Your Board of Directors
Non-Executive Directors
Chris Sparks
Chair of the Risk Committee
Chris was appointed to the Board as a Non-
Executive Director on 1
st
March 2025. He is a non-
Executive Director and Chair of the Risk Committee
of Unity Trust Bank PLC. Chris spent 9 years at
challenger bank Atom as a member of the Executive
Committee, ensuring risk management excellence
and enabling the successful growth of the bank.
Prior to Atom, Chris had a distinguished leadership
career in the UK Retail Banking sector where he
specialised in finance, data and risk management at
HSBC, GE Capital, RBS and Virgin Money.
Clodagh Gunnigle
Chair of the Remuneration Committee
Clodagh was appointed to the Board as a Non-
Executive Director on 22
nd
September 2025. She
currently serves as a Non-Executive Director of Alpha
Bank London, where she Chairs the Remuneration
Committee; and Admiral Financial Services. She is
also a Non-Executive Director of a domestic violence
charity in Ireland. Clodagh is a chartered accountant
with extensive experience in consumer financial
services across finance, credit and risk. Her executive
career included senior leadership positions at GE
Capital and Arrow Global PLC, where she gained
significant expertise in governance, transformation,
and mergers and acquisitions.
Peter O’Donnell
Chair of the Audit Committee
Peter joined the Board in January 2021. Peter is a
Non-Executive Director at Queen Victoria Hospital
Foundation Trust and is a Member of the Board of
One Family, a mutual insurance company based in
Brighton. He has over 30 years’ experience in
financial services and worked in a variety of senior
finance roles at Prudential, RSA and Aviva. His last
executive role was as Executive Vice President at
Unum, a Fortune 500 company where he was also
CEO of its UK business and Chairman of Unum
Poland. Peter has a Bachelor of Commerce Degree
from University College Dublin, is a fellow of
Chartered Institute of Management Accounting
(‘CIMA’) and has significant experience of both
international and UK financial services markets.
Robin Ashton
Chair of the Board and the Nomination
Committee
Robin joined the Board as a Non-Executive
Director in December 2023 and was appointed
Chair of the Board in July 2024. He is also a Non-
Executive Director and Chair of the Audit & Risk
Committee of Domestic & General Limited,
Member of the Audit & Risk Committee of
Domestic & General Insurance plc and Deputy
Chair of the supervisory board of Domestic &
General Insurance Europe AG. Robin brings sector
knowledge and extensive leadership experience
to the table, having served as Chair of Leeds
Building Society for over seven years and as a
Non-Executive Director and Senior Independent
Director at Shawbrook Group plc.
Kerry Spooner
Senior Independent Director
Kerry joined the Board as a Non-Executive Director
in September 2016. Kerry is also independent Non-
Executive Chair of the Remuneration Committee of
The Bank of Nova Scotia, London Branch and Non-
Executive Chair of the Remuneration Committee of
ANZ Banking Group UK Branch. She had 10 years of
financial services experience in the Building Society
sector before joining the Board. Kerry acted as a
Non-Executive Director at two other building
societies and has experience as Vice Chair, Senior
Independent Director and Chair of Board Risk
Committees. Prior to that she worked as a solicitor
for 20 years, the last nine years as a Corporate
Finance Partner of the international law firm A&O
Shearman.
Kavita Patel
Non-Executive Director
Kavita joined the Board at the beginning of 2017
and is the Board Consumer Duty Champion. Kavita
is also a Non-Executive Director and Deputy Chair
of Foresight Enterprise VCT plc. She was previously
a Partner and Head of Investment Funds at the law
firm, Shakespeare Martineau. Kavita has a wealth
of experience gained during her 25 years at
Shakespeare Martineau advising clients in the
financial services sector, both in the retail and
institutional space, on corporate, regulatory and
governance matters.
Page | 22 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Your Board of Directors
Executive Directors
Changes to the Board in the year to 31
st
December 2025
Chris Sparks was appointed to the Board on 1
st
March 2025.
Clodagh Gunnigle was appointed to the Board on 22
nd
September 2025.
Simon Linares retired from the Board on 30
th
November 2025 following a six-year term with the Society.
Board Committees
Risk
Audit
Nomination
Remuneration
Chris Sparks (Chair)
Peter O’Donnell (Chair)
Robin Ashton (Chair)
Clodagh Gunnigle (Chair)
Clodagh Gunnigle
Clodagh Gunnigle
Peter O’Donnell
Robin Ashton
Peter O’Donnell
Kavita Patel
Kerry Spooner
Kavita Patel
Kavita Patel
Chris Sparks
Kerry Spooner
Kerry Spooner
Kerry Spooner
Sue Hayes
Chief Executive Officer
Sue joined the Society in January 2022 and was
appointed as CEO in March 2022. Sue has
focused her career in Retail and Business Banking
and has held senior positions at Lloyds, HBOS,
NatWest, Santander and Barclays. Sue joined
challenger bank Aldermore in 2018 and more
recently was CEO at GB Bank, a new entrant
challenger, which she took through to the first
stage of the banking licence and raised additional
funding. Sue previously sat on the UK Finance
Mortgage Board as Deputy Chair and has been
nominated to the UK Finance Mortgage Board
again as a Mutual representative. Sue holds an
Executive MBA from Cranfield Business School.
Simon Baum
Chief Risk Officer
Simon joined the Board as a Non-Executive Director
in June 2018, moving to be appointed as an
Executive Director and Chief Risk Officer (‘CRO’) of
the Society in May 2023. Simon has spent over 35
years specialising in risk management within the
financial services sector, holding several senior
positions at Experian, Alliance & Leicester and
Santander, both within the UK and overseas. His
previous roles included Director of Mortgage Risk at
Santander.
Anthony Murphy
Chief Financial Officer
Anthony joined the Society in March 2023 as CFO.
He is also a Council Member of the University of
Nottingham and Chair of Audit and Risk Committee.
Anthony was previously CFO of Tandem, a digital
challenger bank, playing a pivotal role in their
strategic transformation and journey towards
profitability. His prior experience includes CFO
positions in a listed regional bank in the United Arab
Emirates and senior roles in finance and strategy at
Lloyds Banking Group, notably as Finance Director
of its Middle East Business and supported its sale to
HSBC in 2012. Anthony's extensive international
and domestic experience in challenger and
established banks continues to support NBS
ongoing transformation. Anthony is also a member
of CIMA.
Page | 23 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Directors’ Report
The Directors’ Report should be read in
conjunction with the Chair’s Statement, the Chief
Executive’s Review and the Strategic Report on
pages 4 to 15.
Business objectives and activities
NBS is a strong and successful mutual building society, which builds upon its
regional foundations, and has a track record of serving members for over
175 years. At the Society, together we fight for the Extra Ordinary to own
their own home.
Information on the Group’s business objectives and activities are provided
in the Strategic Report on pages 8 to 15.
Business review, future developments and key
performance indicators
The Group’s business activities and future plans are reviewed in the
Strategic Report section of the Annual Report and Accounts on pages 8 to
15. Additionally, within the Strategic Report, we comment upon the
financial (and other) key performance indicators used by the Board during
the year to assist its control, direction and drive for business results.
Principal risks and uncertainties
The principal risks and uncertainties faced by the Group and our approach
to managing these risks can be found in the Risk Management Report on
pages 26 to 30.
Financial risk management objectives and policies
As a result of its normal business activities, the Group is exposed to a variety
of risks, including credit, market and liquidity risk. The Group’s objective is
to minimise the impact of these risks, as well as financial risk, upon its
performance. The Risk Management Report considers this in detail. A
further explanation of the financial risks and the controls in place to manage
them (including the use of derivatives), is given in Note 31 to the Annual
Report and Accounts. Derivatives, including the impact on the 2024 results,
are disclosed in the Strategic Report on page 11.
Results
Group statutory profit before tax for the year was £16.7m (2024: £13.9m).
The Group profit after tax for the year transferred to general reserves
amounted to £10.7m (2024: profit after tax of £9.3m). As at 31
st
December
2025, total Group reserves and equity amounted to £266.7m (2024:
£253.3m).
Capital
Group gross capital as at 31
st
December 2025 was £290.8m, (2024:
£277.1m) representing 5.7% (2024: 5.7%) of total shares and borrowings.
Free capital, as at the same date, amounted to £266.3m (2024: £265.8m)
and 5.2% (2024: 5.3%) of total shares and borrowings.
The Annual Business Statement set out on page 94 gives the explanation of
these ratios. The Board remains committed to maintaining a capital position
in excess of its regulatory capital requirement.
Loans and advances
During 2025, total new lending was £883m (2024: £1,215m) with the
average advance being £211,717 (2024: £236,405) and the average debt at
the end of the year being £175,486 (2024: £165,109). As at 31
st
December
2025, there were fourteen cases (2024: sixteen cases) of properties being
12 or more months in arrears or in possession. The total amount of balances
outstanding in those cases was £1,786,136 (2024: £1,636,782), with arrears
of £240,630 (2024: £190,229).
Mortgage losses realised during the year totalled £0.3m (2024: £nil).
Provisions for expected credit losses total £4.5m (2024: £5.2m),
representing 0.11% of mortgage balances (2024: 0.12%).
The Group offers several different forbearance options to members
including reduced payment concessions, payment plans, capitalisations and
mortgage term extensions. As at 31
st
December 2025, the Group had 91
loans (2024: 76) subject to some form of forbearance.
Supplier payment policy
The Group is committed to deal responsibly with suppliers. The policy is that
payment will be made 30 days from the receipt of the invoice, provided that
the supplier has complied with all relevant terms and conditions. Variation
of the 30 day policy can be agreed at the time an order is placed.
As at 31
st
December 2025, the total amount owed to suppliers was
equivalent to 15 days’ credit (2024: 27 days).
Charitable and political donations
During the year, the Group made charitable donations of £144,511 (2024:
£124,437). No contributions were made for political purposes.
Country-by-country reporting
The Capital Requirements (Country-by-Country Reporting) Regulations
place certain reporting obligations on financial institutions within scope of
the Capital Requirements Directive.
The nature of the activities of the Society are set out under business
objectives of this report and for each of the Society’s subsidiaries in Note 16
to the Annual Report and Accounts. All the activities of the Society and its
subsidiaries are conducted in the UK and therefore 100% of the total
income, statutory profit before tax and tax shown in the Income Statement
as well as employee figures disclosed in Note 7, are related to the UK. The
Society and its subsidiaries have not received any public subsidies.
Environment & sustainability
The Sustainability Report on pages 18 to 20 outlines the Society’s position
in line with the requirements of the Financial Stability Board’s TCFD.
Directors’ responsibilities in respect of the Annual
Report, the Annual Business Statement, the
Directors’ Report and the Annual Accounts
The Directors are responsible for preparing the Annual Report, Annual
Business Statement, Directors' Report and the Annual Accounts in
accordance with applicable law and regulations. The Building Societies Act
1986 (‘the Act’) requires the Directors to prepare Group and Society Annual
Accounts for each financial year. Under that law they are required to
prepare the Group Annual Accounts in accordance with UK adopted
International Accounting Standards (‘IAS’) and applicable law and have
elected to prepare the Society Annual Accounts on the same basis.
The Group and Society Annual Accounts are required by law and UK adopted
IAS to present fairly the financial position and the performance of the Group
and the Society; the Act provides in relation to such Annual Accounts that
references in the relevant part of that Act to Annual Accounts giving a true
and fair view are references to their achieving a fair presentation.
In preparing each of the Group and Society Annual Accounts, the Directors
are required to:
• select suitable accounting policies in accordance with International
Accounting Standard 8: Accounting Polices, Changes in Accounting
Estimates and Errors and apply them consistently;
• present information, including accounting policies, in a manner that
provides relevant, reliable, comparable and understandable
information;
• state whether they have been prepared in accordance with UK
adopted IAS and those parts of the Building Societies Act 1986 and
Building Societies (Accounts and Related Provisions) Regulations 1998
applicable to societies reporting under UK adopted IAS; and
• prepare the Annual Accounts on the going concern basis unless it is
inappropriate to presume that the Group and Society will continue in
business.
Page | 24 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Directors’ Report
In addition to the Annual Accounts, the Act requires the Directors to
prepare, for each financial year, an Annual Business Statement and a
Directors' Report, each containing prescribed information relating to the
business of the Group.
Directors’ responsibilities for accounting records
and internal control
The Directors are responsible for ensuring that the Group:
• keeps proper accounting records that disclose with reasonable
accuracy, at any time, the financial position of the Group and Society,
in accordance with the Act; and
• takes reasonable care to establish, maintain, document and review
such systems and controls as are appropriate to its business in
accordance with the rules made by the FCA and the PRA under the
Financial Services and Markets Act 2000.
The Directors have general responsibility for taking such steps as are
reasonably open to them to safeguard the assets of the Group and to
prevent and detect fraud and other irregularities.
The Directors are responsible for the maintenance and integrity of the
corporate and financial information included on the Society's website.
Legislation in the UK governing the preparation and dissemination of
Financial Statements may differ from legislation in other jurisdictions.
The Directors who held office at the date of approval of this Directors’
Report confirm that, so far as each of them is aware, there is no relevant
audit information of which the Group’s auditor is unaware, and each
director has taken all the steps that they ought to have taken as directors to
make themselves aware of any relevant information and to establish that
the Group’s auditor is aware of that information.
Directors’ statement pursuant to the UK
Corporate Governance Code
As required by the UK Corporate Governance Code, the Directors confirm
their opinion that the Annual Report and Accounts, taken as a whole, are
fair, balanced and understandable and provide the information necessary
for members to assess the performance, strategy and business model of the
Society. Details of the governance procedures that have been implemented
to support this can be found in the BAC Report on pages 35 and 36.
Going concern and viability
Going concern
In preparing the Annual Accounts the Directors must satisfy themselves that
it is reasonable to adopt the going concern basis.
The Directors have considered the risks and uncertainties discussed on
pages 13 to 15 and 26 to 30, and the extent to which they might affect the
preparation of the Annual Report and Accounts on a going concern basis.
Key to this consideration were the risks associated to regulatory capital,
liquidity and financial performance, together with the potential effects of
prevailing interest rates, inflationary pressures and climate-related factors.
The Group’s business activities and future plans are reviewed in the Chair’s
Statement and Chief Executive’s Review on pages 4 to 7. In addition, Note
31 to the Annual Report and Accounts includes the Group’s policies and
processes for managing financial instrument risk such as liquidity risk,
interest rate risk and credit risk.
As with many other financial institutions, the Group meets its day-to-day
liquidity requirements through prudent management of its retail and
wholesale funding sources. It ensures it maintains sufficient liquidity to
meet both normal business demands and those that may arise in stressed
circumstances. The Society has a surplus to regulatory capital requirements
and is forecasting this to remain across the going concern assessment
period.
Furthermore, the Group’s forecasts and plans, taking account of current and
possible future operating conditions, including stress tests and scenario
analysis, which have considered income, expenses and overall quality of the
mortgage portfolio, indicate that the Group has sufficient operating liquidity
and capital for the foreseeable future, and specifically for the going concern
assessment period to 4
th
March 2027, covering a period of at least twelve
months from the date of the approval of the Annual Report and Accounts.
As such, the Directors are satisfied that the Group has adequate resources
to continue in business and to use the going concern basis in preparing the
accounts.
Viability statement
In accordance with the 2024 Guidance to the UK Corporate Governance
Code, the Board has also assessed the prospects of the Society over a period
longer than the 12-months required by the going concern provision. The
Board has conducted this review for a period of five years. This is consistent
with the planning horizon used for corporate planning.
The corporate plan considers the Group’s profitability, cash flows, liquidity
and capital requirements as well as other key financial ratios over the
period. These ratios are subject to sensitivity analysis and stress testing,
which involves varying the main assumptions of the forecast, both
individually and in unison. Where appropriate, this stress testing is carried
out to evaluate the potential impact of the Group’s principal risks occurring
(which are outlined in the Risk Management Report on page 26).
The Society maintains continuous monitoring of the external environment
to identify both current and emerging risks. This includes assessing the
implications of changes in the interest rate environment, alongside the
potential impacts of other risks such as those associated with climate change
and operational resilience. We continue to develop and strengthen our key
financial crime and cyber controls to safeguard our customers and services,
while ensuring ongoing compliance with all regulatory obligations.
Based on the reviews completed, the Board considers that the Society is
viable over the medium-term.
Directors
The names of the Directors of the Society who served during the year and
up to the date of signing the accounts, their roles and membership of board
committees are detailed in the Governance section on pages 32 to 34. Other
business interests are shown in the Annual Business Statement. None of the
Directors have any beneficial interest in, or any rights to subscribe for shares
in, or debentures of, any connected undertaking of the Society, as at 31
st
December 2025.
Subsequent to the year end, Anthony Murphy resigned from his position as
the Society’s CFO. He will continue to stand for re‑election and remain in
post until his planned departure in May 2026.
Auditor
A resolution to reappoint Ernst and Young LLP as auditors of the Society will
be proposed at the AGM.
On behalf of the Board,
Robin Ashton
Chair
4
th
March 2026
Page | 25 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Nomination Committee Report
Statement by the Chair of the Nomination
Committee
I am pleased to introduce our 2025 Nomination Committee (‘NomCo’)
report, offering an overview and summary of our actions throughout the
calendar year. This report also provides details regarding the Committee's
role and duties.
Committee responsibilities
The NomCo plays a vital role in building a capable and diverse leadership
team and fostering the organisation's long-term success.
• Oversight of succession planning and pipeline development for
Directors and Senior Management, ensuring an appropriate focus on
the balance of skills, knowledge, experience and diversity;
• Succession planning for the board and its committees;
• Oversight of the appointment and induction process for Board
candidates;
• Agreeing the approach and coordination of the annual Board
Performance Review;
• Review of the Directors Conflicts of Interest Policy, including
monitoring any potential, perceived or actual conflicts of interest; and
• Ongoing assessment of the independence and time commitment of
Non-Executive Directors.
Committee structure and operations
The Committee membership on 31
st
December 2025 comprised:
Robin Ashton (Chair)
Non-Executive Director and Chair of the
Board
Peter O’Donnell
Non-Executive Director and Chair of the
BAC
Kerry Spooner
Non-Executive Director, Senior
Independent Director
The detail of the skills and experience of the Committee members can be
found in their biographies on pages 21 to 22.
The Committee met on six occasions during the year. After each meeting,
the Committee Chair reports to the Board the activities of the NomCo,
highlighting significant decisions made.
Appointments
In November 2025, Simon Linares stepped down from his role as Non-
Executive Director, Chair of the Remuneration Committee and member of
this Committee. To ensure a suitable ongoing membership of the
Committee, Peter O’Donnell, Chair of the BAC, was invited to join NomCo
upon Simon’s departure.
Committee activities
The following outlines the Committee’s activities and areas of focus during
the year:
Appointments
• Recommended the appointment of two Non-
Executive Directors –
Chris Sparks and Clodagh
Gunnigle. These appointments were
subject to
extensive external checks and regulatory approval;
• Recommended the appointment of an Interim CFO
due to cover a period of illness for Anthony Murphy, and
the permanent appointments of the Society’s Chief
Customer Officer (‘CCO’), Chief Savings Officer (‘CSO’)
and Chief Technology Officer (‘CTO’);
• Received updates from management on the status of
Senior Management Function applications; and
Reviewed and approved the Society’s Management
Responsibilities Map under the Senior Manager &
Certification Regime.
Succession
Planning
• Reviewed the succession plans for both the Board and
Senior Management; and
• Agreed a candidate profile and engaged a third-party
to begin searching for a new Non-Executive Director.
Board
Composition &
Development
• Reviewed the size and composition of the Board and
its committees;
• Engaged a third-party to facilitate its triennial external
Board Performance Review, the results of which will be
reported in the 2026 Annual Report & Accounts;
• Reviewed the independence of Non-Executive
Directors; and
• Continued a Board development plan and associated
activities to support it.
Independence
The Committee monitors the independence and tenures of the Society’s Non-
Executive Directors, and makes recommendations to the Board on such
matters.
Kerry Spooner reached the end of her nine-year term as a Non-Executive
Director on 1
st
September 2025. NomCo reviewed her independence and
tenure, and the Board concluded that she should remain as an independent
Non-Executive Director until the 2026 AGM. To provide continuity of
leadership for the benefit of the Society and its members, the Board invited
Kerry to seek re-election as a non-independent Non-Executive Director at the
2026 AGM for a further year. To ensure the highest standards of independence
expected by the Code, Peter O’Donnell was invited to become the Senior
Independent Director from the conclusion of the 2026 AGM, subject to
regulatory approval.
Kavita Patel reached the end of her nine-year term as a Non-Executive Director
on 1
st
January 2026. NomCo reviewed her independence and tenure and the
Board concluded that she should remain as an independent Non-Executive
Director until the 2026 AGM. Kavita will not seek re-election at the AGM.
Equity, diversity and inclusion
The Committee's role is to ensure that both the Board and the Senior
Leadership team mirror the Society's goal of ‘Inviting Difference In’, by valuing
and embracing all colleagues and their unique perspectives.
Diversity encompasses various dimensions, including a well-rounded mix of
skills, experiences, backgrounds and qualifications in our workforce. We
recognise the substantial benefits that diversity brings, particularly in decision-
making. Our commitment to diversity and inclusion extends beyond numerical
targets. Our Diversity, Equity and Inclusion (‘DE&I’) strategy forms the basis for
engaging all colleagues, from the Board to the branch network.
We remain a signatory to the HM Treasury Women in Finance Charter; we
achieved our gender diversity target of 42% this year, with a total of 43% of
women in Senior Management positions. We have also set ourselves an
ambitious target of 50% representation of women in Senior Management
positions for 2026.
We continue to support five employee representation Groups which promote
women in business, wellbeing and inclusivity of race and ethnicity, namely:
‘Women in NBS’, ‘Mental Health & Wellbeing’, ‘Hormonal Health’, ‘Pride’ and
‘Embrace’. These influential groups represent various viewpoints, experiences
and communities who generate thought-provoking work and education to
enhance our business and workplace, creating a sense of belonging and
opportunities for all.
Other matters
Subsequent to the year end, Anthony Murphy has formally resigned from his
position as the Society’s Chief Financial Officer. He will continue to stand for
re‑election and remain in post until his planned departure in May 2026. The
Society has commenced a formal recruitment process to appoint his successor,
and this process is currently underway.
Robin Ashton
Chair of the Nomination Committee
4
th
March 2026
Page | 26 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Risk Management Report
NBS recognises risk as a natural consequence of its business activities and
environment. It endeavours, through positive risk strategies, to manage
these in a manner that ensures delivery of its strategic objectives and
business plan, whilst protecting members’ interests and its financial
resources.
The Board is responsible for ensuring that an effective framework is in place
to promote and embed a risk-aware culture that identifies, appropriately
mitigates and manages the risks the Group and Society face while delivering
its strategic objectives. This includes both current risks and future risks,
including those associated with the implementation of strategy.
The Board reviews and approves key risk management policies annually,
including the RMF, Risk Appetite, ICAAP, ILAAP, Recovery and Resolution
Plan (‘RRP’), Solvent Exit Analysis (‘SEA’) and Solvent Wind Down Plan
(‘SWDP’).
In pursuing its strategy, the Board ensures there are appropriate capabilities
and resources available, along with sufficient capital strength to succeed.
This includes focusing on risk and reward to ensure both remain at an
acceptable level.
The Society operates a committee governance structure which enables
focused oversight and has clear lines of accountability and alignment to
responsibilities allocated under the Senior Managers and Certification
Regime (‘SMCR’).
The Risk Management Framework
NBS is a low-risk, UK-based organisation and, in common with other financial
institutions, the nature of the business results in several unavoidable or
inherent risks. The Society captures the most material risks to which it is
exposed within eight Principal Risks as follows:
Strategy &
Business Model
Risk
The risk that NBS does not have an appropriate strategy
and Corporate Plan to deliver sustainable long-term
value to members and / or fails to effectively implement
and execute the strategy. Strategy Risk includes
consideration of climate related risks.
Capital
Management
The risk that NBS does not maintain sufficient capital to
meet regulatory requirements, absorb unexpected
losses, or support its operations effectively. This
includes NBS’s ability to allocate capital effectively and
manage it prudently across a range of business and
economic environments, ensuring resilience to financial
stresses and compliance with regulatory standards.
Market &
Interest Rate
The risk to NBS’s net interest income and economic
value arising from changes in market interest rates and
mismatches in the Society’s Balance Sheet.
Retail Credit
The risk of loss stemming from a borrower’s failure to
repay a loan or otherwise meet a contractual obligation.
[Note: wholesale credit risk is covered under Liquidity
and Funding Risk].
Liquidity &
Funding
The risk that NBS, although solvent, does not have
sufficient financial resources available to meet its
obligations as they fall due.
Legal &
Regulatory
Legal & Regulatory Risk is the risk that NBS: fails to
comply with legal and regulatory requirements;
fails to enter into legally effective contracts; and/or
acts in a way that leads to litigation being commenced
against it.
Customer &
Conduct
The risk associated with failure to deliver good
outcomes for NBS’s members.
Operational
Risk of losses or impact on customers, reputation or
resilience, resulting from inadequate or failed
procedures, systems and controls, including those
resulting from disruption or damage to technology, poor
implementation of software or cyber/data breaches.
The RMF is an integral part of the Group’s formal structure, assisting the
Board in overseeing all aspects of risk management. BRC reviews and
approves policy statements, risk appetite statements, and risk management
committee terms of reference. It receives summary management
information and minutes from the individual risk management committees.
The RMF is reviewed annually by the BRC and recommended to the Board
for approval. It is based on the ‘three lines of defence’ model (described on
page 34) and focuses on:
• Clear accountability and ownership;
• Defined roles and responsibilities;
• Identification and definition of PRTs;
• Definition of Risk Appetite Framework;
• Establishment of the generic risk management cycle (Identify, Assess,
Manage, Report);
• Articulation of the respective roles of the three lines of defence; and
• Approach for monitoring and reporting on risk.
Day-to-day risk management is the responsibility of the ERC, which oversees
the Society’s risk committees, as detailed in the diagram below:
Page | 27 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Risk Management Report
Committee Structure
Day-to-day risk management is the responsibility of the ERC, which oversees
the Society’s risk committees, as detailed in the diagram below:
Board Risk Committee
As detailed on page 31, the membership of the BRC comprises of Non-
Executive Directors. It is responsible for ensuring:
• Key risks are identified and appropriate steps taken by Management
to mitigate them;
• New and emerging risks are identified and reviewed through the
horizon scanning process;
• Due consideration is given to all significant matters relating to
governance, control, regulatory and compliance issues;
• Capital and liquidity are maintained to address the Group’s key risk
exposures, both to ensure regulatory compliance and to support the
achievement of strategic goals;
• All conduct risks (including Consumer Duty) are properly considered,
to ensure regulatory compliance and the achievement of good
outcomes for all our members;
• NBS has considered the risks to operational resiliency and mitigated
them to within approved tolerances;
• Climate related financial risks have been appropriately identified,
managed and mitigated; and
• The effective monitoring of the Group’s key risks and controls.
BRC meets at least four times per year to review risk management activities
and consolidated management information regarding existing and
emerging areas of risk.
The scope of the BRC extends to all types of risk faced by the Group with
the management of certain risks being delegated to the ERC, ExCo and
relevant management committees. The responsibilities of these
committees are described on the following page.
Executive Committee
The ExCo is responsible for acting on behalf of the Board in formulating
strategy, the business plan and for organising the Society’s assets and
resources to deliver value to members in a fair and appropriate manner. The
Committee is chaired by the CEO and comprises all Executive team
members.
Strategic Risk
When discussing future strategy, the ExCo and ultimately the Board takes
care to ensure that risks associated with maintaining a sustainable society
are evaluated and that plans are in place to affect any required risk
mitigation. These include risks associated with changes to the external and
economic environment, regulatory and statutory developments, people
and resources, strategic partnerships and alliances and change execution.
The ExCo oversees the detailed evaluation and monitoring of these risks.
The Committee also oversees the management of risks relating to changes
in the external environment, which have the potential to affect the Group’s
business model either through the level of demand for products and
services and / or its ability to meet that demand. This includes responsibility
for monitoring the macroeconomic environment and formulating NBS’s
strategic response to regulatory changes relating to climate change,
operational resilience and Consumer Duty.
The Committee looks to mitigate this exposure through regular review of its
Group corporate plan, ensuring activities remain within risk appetites.
Executive Risk Committee
The ERC is responsible for acting on behalf of the Board and the BRC in the
management and oversight of NBS’s principal risks. It reviews relevant
policies to ensure that the Society acts in such a way as to organise, manage
and protect the Society’s assets to deliver value to members through the
provision of savings and mortgages, whilst remaining within legal,
regulatory and agreed Board risk appetites.
The Committee enables the BRC to fulfil its role by ensuring that:
• There is executive level oversight of the RMF;
• Accountability and responsibility for managing risk is clearly defined;
• The risk culture of the Society is defined and embedded;
• The nature and extent of the most material risks to NBS are
determined and understood, including the eight PRTs and any
thematic risks;
• Appropriate risk appetites are defined and documented;
• NBS, at all times, operates within stated risk appetites;
• Processes are in place to consistently identify, measure, assess,
monitor and control risks;
• The risk event process is effectively capturing and reporting on
operational failures;
• The horizon scanning process is identifying emerging risks and
regulatory themes;
Page | 28 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Risk Management Report
• NBS is compliant with regulatory requirements, including the ICAAP
and ILAAP process;
• The Society operates within its impact tolerance statements for its
important business services and remains operationally resilient;
• NBS maintains an up to date and adequate RRP which fully reflects
the requirements of the Board and regulators; and
• Conduct related risks are appropriately identified, managed and
reported to the BRC.
The Committee is provided with regular updates on the principal risk
categories by first line management.
To ensure the effective monitoring and reporting of risk, NBS maintains a
risk register to help management assess the probability and impact of the
risks identified, and the effectiveness of mitigating controls.
The Committee is chaired by the CRO and includes all Executive SMFs, risk
owners and other senior colleagues.
Assets and Liabilities Committee
The Assets and Liabilities Committee (‘ALCo’) is responsible for overseeing
NBS’s liquidity risk, market and interest rate risk, wholesale credit risk and
its capital risk. In addition, ALCo reviews treasury activity for compliance
with approved treasury policies and procedures. The Committee is chaired
by the CFO and the membership is made up of relevant senior executives
including but not limited to the CEO and CRO; the Head of Treasury; and
other relevant senior managers.
Market and Interest Rate Risk
The Society defines market and interest rate risk as the risk to net interest
income and economic value arising from changes in market interest rates
and mismatches in the Society’s Balance Sheet. Economic value is the
present value of the Society’s future cash flows.
As the uncertain economic environment persists, the Society continues to
actively monitor its position against its interest risk appetite to mitigate the
impact that any future change to interest rates might have in adversely
affecting the Society’s interest margin.
The Society’s limits for the management of market and interest rate risk are
documented in the Market & Interest Rate Risk policy, which is developed,
defined and recommended by ALCo and considered and approved
ultimately by the BRC.
Basis, gap and repricing risk are all elements of interest rate risk captured
by the market and interest rate risk category.
The Treasury Middle Office team measures the levels of interest rate risk in
the Society’s Balance Sheet, as well as subjecting the Balance Sheet to stress
tests designed to measure the likely impact of a sudden change in interest
rates. This is assessed weekly for stresses to economic value and monthly
for stresses to net interest income and monitored against the Board
approved risk appetite.
The Treasury team is responsible for day-to-day management of the
Society’s interest rate risk exposures within the approved risk appetites.
Typically interest rate risk is managed by taking advantage of natural
hedging opportunities within our Balance Sheet or using appropriate
hedging instruments.
ALCo is responsible for reviewing Treasury activity, performance and
compliance with the approved policy and risk appetites.
Liquidity Risk
The Society defines liquidity risk as the risk that the Society, although
solvent, does not have available sufficient financial resources to enable it to
meet its obligations as they fall due. This risk is managed through holding
cash and other high quality liquid assets and maintaining wholesale funding
facilities.
ALCo develops, defines and recommends the liquidity risk appetite, which
is considered and approved by the Board and documented in the Liquidity
Risk policy. The liquidity risk appetite helps to ensure that the management
of the liquidity portfolio by the Treasury team supports the corporate plan.
The Liquidity policy sets the framework for the day-to-day activities of the
Treasury team to ensure that all liquidity management activities are
conducted within approved risk appetites. The Society maintains a diverse
funding base and ensures compliance with applicable regulatory
requirements. Defined control limits determine the overall level of liquidity
to be maintained. The base level and composition of the Society’s liquidity
is subject to PRA guidance and regular stress testing and is also documented
as part of its ILAAP, as required by the PRA.
The Society is required to be compliant with the LCR, which measures the
amount of HQLA relative to modelled net stressed cash outflows within a
30-day period.
The Society also maintains a funding profile in line with the Retail Deposit
Ratio, which ensures that a sufficient proportion of our lending is supported
by stable retail deposits, reflecting our focus on sustainable,
member‑funded growth.
Based on our current and forecast liquidity positions, the liquidity portfolio
held by the Society comfortably exceeds the minimum requirements of the
LCR. Similarly, the funding profile exceeds the future requirements under
the NSFR.
The Society has documented an RRP, which describes those metrics that
would indicate an emerging market-wide or Society-specific stress event.
The Plan includes a range of options available to the Society should such a
stress event crystalise to ensure adequate levels of liquidity and capital are
maintained.
Regular stress testing is performed to confirm that the Society’s available
liquidity is adequate, within risk appetite and is sufficient to support
extreme levels of net cash outflows.
Responsibility for the day-to-day operational management of liquidity risk
lies with the Head of Treasury, with operational oversight provided by the
Treasury Middle Office team and reported to ALCo. A detailed analysis of
the Society’s liquidity profile can be found on page 12.
Wholesale Credit Risk
Wholesale credit risk arises from counterparties who may be unable to
repay loans and other financial instruments that the Society holds as part of
its liquidity portfolio.
The Society’s risk of counterparty default is relatively low due to the high
proportion of total liquidity held in UK Sovereign debt securities and the BoE
Reserve Account. The composition of the treasury assets can be found on
page 12.
The Society’s Liquidity policy sets out the amounts, products and
counterparties under which Treasury liquid assets can be held. Credit
worthiness of counterparties is assessed using several factors including
minimum acceptable credit ratings approved by the BRC, together with
lending limits. The policy also allows for investments in multilateral
development banks, covered bonds and RMBS, subject to criteria set by the
BRC. The Board does not permit any lending directly to sovereign states,
other than the UK Government, and all lending is in Sterling.
The Board, via the approved policy, further restricts the level of risk by
placing limits on the amount of exposure that can be taken in relation to
one counterparty or group of counterparties, and to industry sectors and
geographical regions.
The Society’s Treasury team has day-to-day responsibility for operating
within Board approved credit limits. Monitoring and oversight, including
assessment of counterparty credit worthiness, is undertaken by the
Treasury team to ensure all exposures remain within risk appetite. This
information is shared with ALCo.
Capital Risk
Page | 29 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Risk Management Report
NBS conducts timely evaluations of its capital adequacy and financial
resources to determine the level of capital required to support current and
future risks contained within its strategic plan. This process, which is a
regulatory requirement, is known as the ICAAP.
The ICAAP assesses NBS’s future capital requirements by considering
changes to business volumes, the type and mix of assets, and business
activities within the context of current and future anticipated risks and
stress scenarios. The ICAAP also incorporates the Capital Requirement
Directive requirements.
The PRA uses the ICAAP during its Supervisory Review and Evaluation
Process (‘SREP’) through which it determines the amount of capital it
requires NBS to hold.
The Board monitors the current and future level of capital held by the
Society in relation to its TCR on a regular basis. The Society’s current and
future capital levels remain well in excess of the PRA requirements. An
analysis of the components of NBS’s current capital position can be found
in the Strategic report on page 13.
Pricing Committee
The Pricing Committee is a sub-committee of the ALCo. The Committee is
responsible for managing the Society’s Mortgage and Savings pricing with
reference to target Risk adjusted Return on Capital, Margins and volumes
to achieve the strategy outlined by the Board-approved Business Plan.
The Committee reviews appropriate Management Information (‘MI’) in
relation to the Society’s mortgages and savings in order to assess volume
and profitability performance and initiate any required actions to remediate
underperformance or deliver overperformance against the key customer
balance sheet and income lines. The Committee has the ability to approve
pricing changes to support business plan objectives
Retail Credit Committee
RCC is comprised of relevant executives and senior managers and chaired
by the CRO. It is responsible for oversight of the Society’s retail credit risks,
which includes exposures to residential and BTL mortgages, limited
company BTL mortgages and SBL.
Retail Credit Risk
The Society defines retail credit risk as the risk of loss stemming from a
borrower’s failure to repay a loan or otherwise meet a contractual
obligation. As a building society, this is most likely to arise through the
inability of borrowers to repay a mortgage. The Society’s exposure to retail
credit risk is limited to the provision of loans secured on property within
England and Wales.
A Retail Credit Risk Framework and associated credit risk appetite is
developed and proposed by the RCC, reviewed by ERC and considered and
approved by the BRC (with risk appetite being reserved for approval by the
Board). The Society manages the level of credit risk it undertakes by
applying various control disciplines, the objectives of which are to maintain
asset quality in line with approved risk appetite. The Board receives regular
monthly information on risk appetite limits.
Exposure to retail credit risk is carefully monitored by the RCC. Day-to-day
retail credit risk is managed through the application of prudent lending
policies, which are aligned to the stated risk appetites. This ongoing
monitoring provides assurance that current and future exposures, such as
LTV levels, geographic concentration and probability of default, are
managed within the risk appetite limits set by the Board.
The Society remains committed to promoting home ownership and its risk
appetite allows lending to first time buyers, but it restricts the overall level
of high loan-to-value lending to limit concentration risk. Similarly, NBS
continues to follow its long-term policy of also offering interest-only
products to a small number of borrowers, which are covered by strict
policies and monitoring procedures.
The Society regularly stress tests the mortgage portfolio to detect any signs
of potential payment stress or sensitivity for its borrowers to the impact of
future rate rises. The mortgage portfolio shows resilience to the impact of
recent rate rises, but the Society ensures adequate monitoring and analysis
are in place to ensure early detection of any potential deterioration.
Considering recent regulatory developments, the Society has also designed
a stress testing framework for the potential effects of climate change on
property values. This will be an area of increased focus in future years for
the Society, the wider sector and the regulators.
All mortgage loan applications are reviewed by an individual underwriter
supported using application scorecards. Credit reference bureau data is
obtained on all applications, which in turn supports our responsible lending
requirements. The Society also shares account performance data with the
selected bureaux. The Society’s lending has become increasingly
geographically diversified throughout England and Wales over the last few
years with no one area dominating the portfolio.
The Society continues to be a responsible lender and its approach to lending
is based on making sure that members can afford to meet their mortgage
repayments from the outset, using a prudent affordability calculator, as well
as our manual underwriting processes. Should members find themselves in
financial difficulty, the Society responds with appropriate forbearance and
collections activities to ensure good member outcomes. It also supports
members who experience temporary financial difficulties by providing the
assistance they require to enable them to regularise their financial
arrangements. Only as a matter of last resort does the Society seek to take
a property into possession.
The Society is committed to providing support to those members who are
experiencing difficulties in meeting their mortgage payments due to the
impacts of the cost-of-living crisis. We will continue to ensure that members
receive good outcomes and offer appropriate forbearance activities
throughout the cost-of-living crisis and beyond.
The Society does not have any exposure to the sub-prime mortgage market,
it lends only to ‘prime’ customers and has never written ‘self-certified’
lending business.
Legal and Regulatory Risk Committee
The Society, being a provider of mortgage and savings, is regulated by both
the FCA and the PRA.
The LRC oversees how NBS manages legal and regulatory risk so that
services are conducted in line with relevant legislation and statutory
requirements.
The Committee is chaired by the General Counsel & Society Secretary,
supported by relevant senior managers.
Each business area is responsible for ensuring that all regulatory and
statutory requirements are complied with on a day-to-day basis. Formal
oversight is provided by the Compliance Function through a programme of
compliance monitoring.
NBS has a very low appetite for breaches of regulation or for any activity
that may breach its legal obligations
Page | 30 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Risk Management Report
Operational Risk Committee
ORC is responsible for actively overseeing the management of operational
risk across NBS. It is also responsible for ensuring that the Society maintains
sufficient operational resilience to ensure the ongoing delivery of key
services to members.
The Committee is chaired by the CTO supported by relevant senior
managers.
To allow the Committee to focus on the key elements of operational risk
(which includes ‘people risk’ in respect of our own colleagues and ‘third
party risk’ in respect of reliance on third parties and partners to deliver key
elements of our proposition and our operational resilience framework), the
Committee meets monthly.
NBS defines operational risk as the risk of loss resulting from human factors,
inadequate or failed internal processes and systems, or from external
events. Operational risk exists in every aspect of NBS’s business activities.
Proactive management of operational risk is essential in helping NBS
achieve both short-term operational objectives and longer-term strategic
goals.
To ensure that NBS’s services are operationally resilient, the Committee is
also responsible for ensuring that processes are in place to prevent, adapt,
respond to, recover and learn from operational disruptions. The Committee
oversees the process by which the Society identifies its important business
services, understands and remediates any potential weaknesses in the
supporting processes, ensures that appropriate business continuity plans
are in place and verifies that third party suppliers can meet our members’
needs at all times.
One of the key processes that support the effective identification and
management of operational risk is the risk event process, which provides a
mechanism for operational incidents to be reported, their impacts assessed,
remediation to be performed and root cause analysis to be undertaken,
thereby reducing the risk of recurrence.
The Committee also continues to work on embedding the Society’s
approach to operational resilience, in response to the Regulator’s increased
focus in this area.
Customer and Conduct Risk Committee
Customer & Conduct Risk Committee (‘CCRC’) is charged with overseeing
customer and conduct risks across all relevant business activities and is
chaired by the Chief Customer Officer. It has general responsibility for
monitoring the Society’s alignment with the Consumer Duty to support
good outcomes for members.
The Committee reviews relevant management information and reporting
on customer impacting matters, including but not limited to: Complaints MI,
customer impacting risk events, performance data on customer facing
processes and has general oversight of the impact of product and pricing on
members.
The Committee also exercises specific focus on regulatory obligations to
members around affordability and vulnerability.
Change Committee
Change Committee (‘CC’) is chaired by the CTO and is responsible for the
oversight and management of Transformation and Change risk; for which it
reports to ExCo. It is also responsible for ensuring that transformation and
change activity supports the effective delivery of the Society’s strategy. The
CC acts on behalf of the ExCo, monitoring delivery execution and
operational tolerance impact of transformational, large and small business
change for the Society through the effective control of a portfolio of change
activity. The CC is informed by the Group corporate plan and specifically
owns the change execution plan on behalf of the ExCo, ensuring effective
delivery, balancing risk and benefit in the achievement of the Society’s
strategy.
Page | 31 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Board Risk Committee Report
Board Risk Committee
The BRC is tasked with ensuring fit for purpose risk management
arrangements are in place and for reviewing the Society’s risk exposures on
an ongoing basis, on behalf of the Board. It assesses applicable policies to
ensure that the Society operates in a manner that safeguards and efficiently
administers the Society’s assets, delivering benefits to members via savings
and mortgages, all while adhering to legal requirements, regulations, and
the agreed-upon risk appetites of the Board.
Committee structure
The BRC is a Board Committee and at 31
st
December 2025, the Committee
membership was made up as follows:
Chris Sparks (Chair)
Non-Executive Director and Chair of BRC
Kerry Spooner
Non-Executive Director, Senior Independent
Director
Peter O’Donnell
Non-Executive Director and Chair of the BAC
Kavita Patel
Non-Executive Director
Clodagh Gunnigle
Non-Executive Director and Chair of RemCo
The detail of the skills and experience of the Committee members can be
found in their biographies on pages 21 to 22.
The Committee met on eight occasions during the year. After each meeting,
the Committee Chair reports to the Board the activities of the BRC
highlighting significant decisions made.
Appointments
On 1
st
March 2025, Chris Sparks was appointed to the Board as a Non-
Executive Director and a member of the BRC. Subsequently Chris was
appointed Chair of the Board Risk Committee and chaired his first meeting
on 6
th
June.
Kerry Spooner stood down as Chair of Board Risk Committee and chaired
her final meeting on 28
th
April 2025. She continues as a member of the
Committee. Simon Linares retired from the Board on 30
th
November 2025.
He stood down as a member of BRC on 6
th
November 2025.
Committee responsibilities
The BRC monitors the Society’s overall risk exposure. The BRC fulfils its role
by ensuring:
• There is executive-level oversight of RMF;
• Accountability and responsibility for managing risk are clearly defined;
• The risk culture of the Society is defined and embedded;
• The nature and extent of the most significant risks to the Society are
determined and understood, including the eight principal risk types
and any thematic risks;
• Appropriate risk appetites are defined and documented;
• NBS, at all times, operates within stated risk appetites;
• Processes are in place to consistently identify, measure, assess,
monitor, and control risks;
• The risk event process is effectively capturing and reporting on
operational failures;
• The horizon scanning process is identifying emerging risks and
regulatory themes;
• The Society is compliant with regulatory requirements, including the
ICAAP and ILAAP process;
• The Society operates within its impact tolerance statements for its
important business services and remains operationally resilient;
• The Society maintains an up-to-date and adequate RRP;
• Conduct-related risks are appropriately identified, managed, and
reported (including Consumer Duty related); and
• Climate related financial risks are appropriately identified, managed
and mitigated.
Committee activities
The following outlines the Committee’s activities and areas of focus during
the year:
Strategy &
Risk Appetite
• Review of strategic risk appetite statements;
• Review of operational resilience self-assessment; and
• Review of strategic risk dashboards.
Policy
• Review and update to the Society’s RMF;
• Review and update to the Society’s Operational Risk
Management Framework;
• Annual review and approval of Capital Adequacy and
Liquidity and Funding Risk Policies;
• Annual approval of Compliance Monitoring Plan; and
• Approval of Financial Crime Policy.
Stress
Testing
• Review and recommendation of the ICAAP to the Board;
• Review and recommendation of the ILAAP to the Board;
• Review and recommendation of the RRP to the Board;
• Review and recommendation of Pillar 3 Disclosures to the
Board; and
• Review and recommendation of the Solvent Exit Plan to
the Board.
Risk
Management
• Review of credit risk profile of mortgage portfolios; and
• Review of annual Money Laundering Reporting Officer’s
report.
Risk
Monitoring
• Review of risk exposure relative to appetite and
tolerance measures;
• Review of CRO’s report;
• Horizon scanning;
• O
versight of ERC and subsidiary risk management
committees;
• Review of compliance and conduct risk monitoring
activity (including Consumer Duty); and
• In tandem with the RemCo, review the management of
key risks in determining the variable pay awards due to the
Executive Directors and Senior Management.
Governance
• Review and recommendation of BRC Terms of Reference
to the Board;
• Approval of ERC Terms of Reference; and
• Review of committee performance.
Chris Sparks
Chair of the Board Risk Committee
4
th
March 2026
Page | 32 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Corporate Governance Report
Nottingham Building Society is committed to best
practice in corporate governance and has
considered the requirements of the UK Corporate
Governance Code.
The Board has reviewed the Society’s corporate governance practices
against the UK Corporate Governance Code 2024 (the ‘Code’), which is
intended to apply to listed companies, to the extent that it is relevant to a
building society. In the interest of transparency, each building society is
encouraged to explain in its Annual Report and Accounts whether, and to
what extent, it adheres to the Code. The Board is committed to complying
with best practice in corporate governance.
This report sets out how the Board has operated in 2025 and complied with
the provisions of the Code and concludes that the Board has identified that
it is fully compliant in all material respects with the Code.
The Board has considered the additional requirements introduced by
Provision 29 of the UK Corporate Governance Code, which take effect from
1
st
January 2026. These requirements will be addressed and reported in the
Society’s 2026 Annual Report and Accounts.
Leadership
The Board
As at 31
st
December 2025, the Board consisted of six Non-Executive
Directors (including the Chair) and three Executive Directors, providing a
complementary balance of skills and expertise.
The Board held 11 meetings and one strategy review and business planning
meeting during 2025. In addition, the Non-Executive Directors meet
periodically, without the Executive Directors present, and consider all
aspects of Board responsibilities, governance and performance.
In line with Code principles, the Board is collectively responsible for the
long-term sustainable success of the Society and ensuring that the
necessary resources are in place for the Society to meet its objectives and
measure performance against them. It has a schedule of reserved matters
and its principal function is to focus on how it has considered and addressed
the opportunities and risks to the future success of the Society, the
sustainability of the Society’s business model, and how its governance
enables the delivery of its strategy.
Additionally, it ensures the appropriate financial and business systems and
controls are in place to safeguard members’ interests, maintain effective
corporate governance and measure business performance. All Executive
and Non-Executive Directors can obtain independent professional advice, at
the Society’s expense, should that be necessary in the fulfilment of their
duties, and have access to the services and advice of the General Counsel &
Society Secretary.
Division of responsibilities
The roles of the Chair of the Board and the CEO are held by different people
and are distinct in their purpose, with division of responsibility set out in
writing.
The CEO has direct charge of the Society on a day-to-day basis and is
accountable to the Board for the financial and operational performance of
the Society, as well as for the formation of its strategy.
The Chair, who is elected by the Board annually, leads the Board in
approving its strategy and in the achievement of its objectives. The Chair is
responsible for organising the business of the Board, ensuring its
effectiveness and setting its agenda.
Non-Executive Directors
Independent Non-Executive Directors play a vital role in challenging and
helping develop strategy for the Society, whilst providing independent
judgement, knowledge and experience.
The Board considers all Non-Executive Directors to be independent and free
of any relationship or circumstances that could interfere with the exercise
of their independent judgement. Kerry Spooner reached the end of her
nine‑year term on 1
st
September 2025, and following a review by the
Nominations Committee, the Board agreed that she should remain an
independent Non‑Executive Director until the 2026 AGM.
One of the independent Non-Executive Directors is appointed as the Senior
Independent Director, to provide a sounding board for the Chair and to
serve as an intermediary for the other Directors, as necessary. The Senior
Independent Director is identified on page 21.
Effectiveness
Composition of the Board
The names of the Directors together with brief biographical details are set
out on pages 21 to 22.
The Board has four committees (BRC; NomCo; RemCo; and BAC) to help it
discharge its duties. The terms of reference for these committees are
reviewed annually and are available on the Society’s website.
The four committees meet regularly and current membership of these
committees is shown on page 22.
The table below shows the attendance of each director at the relevant
Board and Board committee meetings. The number to the left is the number
of meetings attended; the number to the right is the number of meetings
the Director was eligible to attend during 2025.
Director
Board
Risk
Nomination
Remuneration
Audit
R Ashton
11/11
-
6/6
5/5
-
S Baum
11/11
-
-
-
-
C Gunnigle
1
3/3
3/3
-
1/1
2/2
S Hayes
11/11
-
-
-
-
S Linares
2
10/10
7/7
4/4
5/5
-
A Murphy
3
6/11
-
-
-
-
P O’Donnell
11/11
8/8
2/2
-
6/6
K Patel
11/11
8/8
5/5
6/6
C Sparks
4
10/10
7/7
-
-
6/6
K Spooner
11/11
8/8
6/6
5/5
6/6
1 C Gunnigle was appointed to the Board on 22
nd
September 2025.
2 S Linares retired from the Board on 30
th
November 2025.
3 A Murphy was not available to attend certain Board meetings during 2025 due to illness.
4 C Sparks was appointed to the Board on 1
st
March 2025.
The minutes of committee meetings are available to the Board. The Board
also receives reports from the Chair of each of the committees on matters
arising from the meetings they chair.
In addition to the four Board committees noted above, ExCo, ERC and ALCo
are delegated authority by the Board to manage the day-to-day operations
of the Society. Each of these committees generally meet once a month and
the membership of each committee is made up of both Executive Directors
and Senior Management. Together, the committees are responsible for
acting on behalf of the Board in organising, managing and protecting the
Society’s assets to deliver value to members, whilst ensuring the Society
operates within the law, regulation and clearly agreed Board risk appetites.
Together they are therefore responsible for ensuring the management and
delivery of four key areas on behalf of the Board: Strategy, Risk
Management, Business Planning, and Operational Oversight. The Risk
Management Report on pages 26 to 30 covers these committees in further
detail.
Page | 33 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Corporate Governance Report
Appointments to the Board
Specialist third party recruitment consultants are engaged to assist with all
Board recruitment activities, whether Executive or Non-Executive
appointments.
The NomCo assists the Board by making recommendations on the Board
and Executive succession plan, recruitment and composition and other
relevant matters. The NomCo considers, annually, the competence and
suitability of those Directors seeking election or re-election at each AGM
The NomCo meets at least twice a year. Additional meetings may be
convened as necessary.
Appointments to the Board are made on merit and against objective criteria
balancing skills, experience, independence and knowledge on the Board.
The Society considers diversity, inclusion and equal opportunity both at
Board-level and in recruitment throughout the business. Candidates for
both Executive and Non-Executive Directorships are recommended by the
NomCo to the Board for approval, with the assistance of external
consultants.
All Directors must meet the requirements of the Senior Managers and
Certification Regime prescribed by the FCA and PRA including, where
appropriate, receiving regulatory approval.
Commitment
Prior to appointment, Non-Executive Directors are required to disclose their
other significant commitments. In addition, Non-Executive Directors
undertake that they will have sufficient time to meet what is expected of
them, recognising the need for availability in the event of crises. In addition,
throughout their tenure with the Society, Directors are required to inform
the Board in advance of any other positions they wish to take up so the time
commitment and any potential conflicts of interest can be considered.
Development
Upon appointment, Directors receive a formal and tailored induction and
throughout their tenure all Directors receive timely and appropriate training
to enable them to properly fulfil their roles. The information and training
requirements of all Directors are reviewed annually.
Information and support
The Chair ensures that all Directors receive accurate, timely and clear
information.
The Society has in place appropriate insurance cover in respect of the
Directors.
Evaluation
Executive Directors are evaluated using the Performance Management
Framework for all employees. The CEO is appraised by the Chair. The
performance of the Non-Executive Directors is reviewed annually by the
Chair. The Senior Independent Director conducts interviews with each
Director to appraise the performance of the Chair, the results of which are
discussed with the Chair.
Each year the Board and each of its committees undertake a review of their
performance during the year. The Code also prescribes that a review should
be undertaken by an independent external party at least every three years,
the last review having been commenced by Linstock in late 2025 and will
continue in early 2026. Both the latest internal review and previous external
reviews confirmed that the Board and its committees operated effectively.
Further details of the 2025 externally-facilitated Board performance review
will be reported in the 2026 Annual Report and Accounts.
Re-election
In 2026, all Directors will submit themselves for election or re-election at
the AGM in accordance with the Code, except for Kavita Patel who will not
seek re-election to the Board.
Anthony Murphy resigned from his position as the Society’s CFO. He will
continue to stand for re‑election and remain in post until his planned
departure in May 2026.
Non-Executive Directors can serve up to a maximum of three three-year
terms, unless an extension is approved by the Board.
The Code requires that the independence of all Non-Executive Directors is
considered as part of the Annual Report of the Society. It is confirmed that,
all the Non-Executive Directors are currently considered to be independent,
and in particular (noting the requirements of the Code) Non-Executive
Directors are required to attest to their independence against the specific
criteria set out in the Code. Please see the NomCo Report on page 25 for
additional details.
The NomCo makes recommendations for the Board concerning the re-
appointment of any Non-Executive Director at the conclusion of their
specified term of office, having due regard to their performance and ability
to continue to contribute to the Board considering knowledge, skills and
experience required.
Accountability and audit
Financial and business reporting
The Directors’ Report on pages 23 to 24 details the responsibilities of the
Directors in preparing the Society’s accounts.
This includes ensuring suitable accounting policies are followed, that a true
and fair view of the Society’s financial position is given and that the Society’s
business is a going concern.
The Board has responsibility to present a fair, balanced and understandable
assessment of the Society’s performance and financial position, business
model and strategy, consideration of which is contained within the Chief
Executive’s Review on pages 5 to 7, the Strategic Report on pages 8 to 15
and within the Annual Report and Accounts taken as a whole.
Viability statement
In accordance with the Guidance to the Code, the Board has assessed the
prospects of the Society over a period longer than the 12-months required
by the going concern provision. The Viability Statement is considered on
page 24 within the Directors’ Report.
Page | 34 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Corporate Governance Report
Risk management and internal control
The responsibilities and activities of the BRC are outlined within the Board
Risk Committee Report on page 31.
The Society’s RMF (approved by the Board) sets out the principal risks facing
the Group, including those that would threaten the business model, future
performance, solvency and liquidity. Principal risks and further information
on risk management is provided in the Risk Management Report on pages
26 to 30.
In accordance with the Code, the Board is committed to maintaining sound
systems and controls to safeguard both its own assets and those of its
members and there is an annual review of risk management and internal
control systems.
The operation of these three lines of defence is embodied in the terms of
reference of the Society’s risk committees. The BRC ensures (on behalf of
the Board) that there are appropriate risk management frameworks and
policies in place for the appropriate identification, assessment, monitoring
and control of all the main sources of risk that the Society faces.
Where weaknesses in controls are identified by the three lines of defence,
the Board monitors the steps taken to remedy the issues and to ensure that
the Society responds to changing external threats and economic
circumstances and to the changing regulatory environment.
Remuneration
Policy and procedures
The level and make-up of Director remuneration and the procedure for
developing policy on executive remuneration, (including fixing the
remuneration packages of individual Directors), is considered by the
RemCo.
The RemCo’s work and the Society’s compliance with the Code principles
relating to remuneration is covered in the Directors’ Remuneration Report
on pages 37 to 40.
Relations with members
Dialogue with members
Engagement with members is undertaken in various ways including
member events, social media, customer panels, regular literature and
mainstream media.
The Society is keen to find out its members’ views so that it can continually
improve. It provides them with several ways and opportunities to give their
feedback. It surveys a selection of its members on a regular basis through
its member satisfaction survey. The results of this feedback are shared in
Board and committee meetings. The Society also encourages its members
to attend its AGM where they can ask questions and voice their opinions.
During 2025, for the first time in the Society’s history and to encourage
broad engagement, members were invited to attend the meeting either in-
person or virtually and invited to pre-submit questions.
Furthermore, each year, the Society produces a Members’ Newsletter,
including the Summary Financial Statement, which provides an abridged
version of information contained within the Annual Report and Accounts.
The Members’ Newsletter is provided to all members as part of its AGM
ancillary documentation.
Constructive use of the AGM
Each year, notice of the AGM is given to all members who are eligible to
vote. Members are sent voting forms and are encouraged to vote online, by
post, at a local branch or by person or proxy at the AGM.
All postal and proxy votes are counted using independent scrutineers.
All members of the Board are present at the AGM each year (unless,
exceptionally, their absence is unavoidable) and the Chairs of the BAC,
NomCo, BRC and RemCo are, therefore, available to answer members’
questions.
The Notice of the AGM and related papers are sent at least 21 days before
the AGM in accordance with the Society’s Rules and the Building Societies
Act 1986.
First Line:
Focus: Control
Day-to-day management and control of risk by the
business. Results reported to Management and BRC
Second Line:
Focus: Oversight
Development and maintenance of coherent Risk
Management Frameworks and ongoing oversight and
challenge of first line risk management and controls.
Results reported to Management and BRC
Third Line:
Focus: Assurance
Independent assurance of effectiveness of risk control
and risk oversight. Results reported to Management
and BAC
Page | 35 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Board Audit Committee Report
Board Audit Committee
The principal role of the BAC is providing support to the Board in its
oversight of financial reporting and the financial control environment across
the Society. The Committee’s primary functions are:
• To monitor the integrity of the Financial Statements and any formal
announcements relating to the Society’s financial performance,
reviewing any significant financial reporting judgements which they
contain including that of the Society’s going concern status;
• To keep under review the Society’s financial control systems and
processes that manage and monitor financial risks;
• To review and approve the statements to be included in the Annual
Report and Accounts concerning internal controls, financial risk
management and the Viability Statement;
• To review the Society’s procedures for detecting fraud and its systems
and controls for the prevention of bribery;
• To monitor and review the effectiveness of the Internal Audit function;
• To approve and review progress of the annual Internal Audit Plan;
• Prior to the members’ vote at the AGM, to make recommendations to
the Board for appointment, re-appointment and / or removal of the
external auditor;
• To review and monitor the external auditor’s independence and
objectivity and the effectiveness of the audit process, taking into
consideration relevant UK law, regulation and applicable ethical
standards;
• To approve the remuneration and terms of engagement of the
Society’s external auditor;
• To develop and implement policy on the engagement of the external
auditor to supply non-audit services, considering relevant ethical
guidance regarding the provision of non-audit services by the external
audit firm; and
• To report to the Board on how the Committee has discharged its
responsibilities.
Committee structure and attendance
The BAC is a Board Committee and at 31
st
December 2025, the Committee
membership was made up as follows:
Peter O’Donnell (Chair)
Non-Executive Director and Chair of BAC
Kerry Spooner
Non-Executive Director, Senior
Independent Director
Chris Sparks
Non-Executive Director and Chair of the BRC
Kavita Patel
Non-Executive Director
Clodagh Gunnigle
Non-Executive Director and Chair of RemCo
The detail of the skills and experience of the Committee members can be
found in their biographies on pages 21 to 22. Members have a broad range
of skills, experience and knowledge relevant to the building society and
financial services sector.
The General Counsel & Society Secretary acts as Secretary to the
Committee, supported by the Deputy Society Secretary. Other individuals
such as the CEO, CFO, CRO, Chief Internal Audit Officer (‘CIAO’) and Finance
Director may be invited to attend all or part of any meeting as and when
appropriate. The external auditor was invited to attend all the Committee’s
meetings held in 2025.
The Committee met on eight occasions during the year. After each meeting,
the Committee Chair reports to the Board the activities of the BRC
highlighting significant decisions made.
Private meetings are held at least once a year with the external auditor and
with the CIAO in the absence of Management to enable issues to be raised
directly if necessary. The Committee Chair meets with the CIAO and the
external auditor on a regular basis.
Following each committee meeting, the minutes of the meeting are
distributed to the Board, and the Committee Chair provides an update at
the next Board meeting on key matters discussed by the Committee.
Meeting frequency and reporting
The Committee met six times in 2025 and during the year:
• Reviewed the results and Annual Report and Accounts for the year
ended 31
st
December 2024;
• Challenged the key loan provision assumptions and judgements,
underlying the analysis of ECL losses proposed by Management;
• Reviewed the going concern and viability statement assumptions and
all key issues and areas of judgement relating to the financial
statement reporting;
• Reviewed reports from the external auditor, including the
Management Letter highlighting system and control
recommendations, key accounting and audit issues and conclusions
for the interim and full year financial statement reporting;
• Reviewed the Annual and Interim Financial Statements and draft press
releases, with consideration of the fair, balanced and understandable
requirements of the UK Corporate Governance Code;
• Received and reviewed reports from Internal Audit on tracking progress
against their plan;
• Reviewed and approved (working with BRC) the statements to be
included in the Annual Report and Accounts concerning internal control,
financial risk management and the Viability Statement; and
• Carried out a review of the Committee’s own performance and terms of
reference
Significant matters in relation to the Financial
Statements
The Committee considers a wide range of matters in relation to the Financial
Statements, which relate mainly to key judgements, accounting policies and
estimates which Management must make during the preparation of the
statements, particularly in respect of large or unusual transactions. During
2025, the significant matters considered by the Committee included:
Expected Credit Loss
(‘ECL’) Provisioning
The Society reviews the IFRS 9 model outputs to
estimate the level of impairment provision
required across the mortgage portfolio, which
uses historical default and loss experience as
well as applying judgement. The Committee
reviewed and challenged the ap
proach to
calculating the provisions and to post-model
adjustments, with the Committee’s assessment
supported by peer benchmarking.
Effective Interest Rate
(‘EIR’) Methodology
The Committee reviewed and challenged the
key assumptions applied within the EIR models,
including expected behavioural life and early
repayment charges.
Hedge Accounting
The Committee reviewed assumptions and
reviewed the change in risk level applied by the
external auditor.
Property Valuation
Methodology
The Committee reviewed Management’s
proposal to move from a Cost to the Revaluation
basis for freehold property, and challenged the
timing and impact on reserves and disclosures.
Going Concern
Assessment & Viability
Statement
The Committee evaluated whether the going
concern basis of accounting was appropriate by
considering forecast profitability, liquidity,
funding availability and regulatory capital
positions. The review also considered stress
testing and scenario analysis,
and the
Committee challenged M
anagement on
scenario weightings and resilience under
combined stress events.
Page | 36 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Board Audit Committee Report
Fair, Balanced &
Understandable
The Committee reviewed the integrity of the
Financial Statements and any formal
announcements. The content of the Annual
Report and Accounts was reviewed and the
Committee advised the Board that, in its view,
and taken as a whole, it is fair, balanced and
understandable and provides the information
necessary for members to assess the Society’s
performance, business model and strategy. The
Committee therefore recommended that the
Board approve the Annual Report and Accounts.
Corporate Governance
Code
The Committee reviewed the impacts on the
Financial Statements of the UK Corporate
Governance Code 2024, and challenged
M
anagement’s plan for compliance with
Provision 29.
Changes to Accounting
Standards & other
Relevant
Developments
The Committee is kept up to date with changes
to accounting standards and relevant
developments in financial reporting and
applicable law. In addition, as appropriate
members are invited to Society-run teach-ins,
and attend relevant seminars and conferences
provided by external bodies.
Independence and effectiveness of external
auditor
In 2023, the Society tendered its external audit relationship in line with best
practice and Ernst & Young LLP were re-engaged and therefore have now been
in post for eleven years as at 31
st
December 2025.
In advance of the commencement of the annual audit, the Committee reviewed
a report presented by the external auditor detailing the audit plan, planning
materiality, areas of audit focus, terms of engagement and fees payable.
Following the review of the Interim Financial Statements and the audit of the
Annual Financial Statements, the Committee received a report detailing the
work performed in areas of significant risk, and a summary of misstatements
and internal control related issues identified. The Committee considered the
matters set out in these reports as part of recommending the Interim and
Annual Financial Statements for approval.
To monitor and assess any threats to the independence of the Auditor, the
Committee reviews a report on the level of spend with the auditor on audit and
non-audit services. The Committee has a framework on the Society’s use of the
external auditor for non-audit work, to ensure their continued independence
and objectivity. The external auditor undertook a six-monthly review of the
Society’s interim results, an audit related assurance service, conducted in
accordance with this policy, and details of any fees paid for these services are
outlined in Note 6 to the accounts.
The Committee considered the performance of Ernst & Young LLP as external
auditor for 2025, and is satisfied with their objectivity, independence and
effectiveness and therefore recommended that they be re-appointed at the
AGM for the current year.
Oversight and effectiveness of internal audit
The Committee receives regular reports from the CIAO setting out the results
of assurance activity, proposed changes to the approved Audit Plan and the
level of resource available. Significant findings and themes identified were
considered by the Committee, alongside Management’s response and the
tracking and completion of outstanding actions. In addition to approving the
annual plan and budget, throughout the year the Committee reviewed and
approved amendments to the Internal Audit Plan and resources.
The Committee regularly monitors whether Internal Audit has delivered its
reports in accordance with the agreed plan and to the expected standard. The
CIAO also carries out an annual review of the effectiveness of the Society’s
system of internal control and reports on the outcome of this review to the
Committee. The CIAO reported an adequate level of assurance in relation to
the Group’s arrangements for risk management, control infrastructure,
governance and fraud prevention controls. The Committee therefore regards
the Internal Audit function to be effective.
Audit Committee performance and effectiveness
As outlined in the Corporate Governance Report on pages 32 to 34, the Board
and each of the committees formally evaluate their own performance annually.
The Committee discussed the results of the 2024 review in October 2025 and
concluded that, overall, the Committee continued to be effective and was
adequately discharging its responsibilities.
Peter O’Donnell
Chair of the Board Audit Committee
4
th
March 2026
Page | 37 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Director’s Remuneration Report
Statement by the Chair of the Remuneration
Committee
On behalf of the Committee, I am pleased to present the annual Directors’
Remuneration Report, which sets out the Remuneration Policy and details
of the Directors’ remuneration in the year ended 31
st
December 2025.
NBS is committed to best practice in its remuneration of directors. This
report explains how the Society applies the relevant principles and
requirements of the remuneration regulations and Codes. The report has
two sections:
• Remuneration Policy, which sets out the Society’s Remuneration
Policy for directors; and
• Annual Remuneration Report, which outlines how the policy was
implemented in 2025.
Committee structure
In 2025, the Remuneration Committee membership was made up as
follows:
Simon Linares
Non-Executive Director and Chair of RemCo
(Retired from the Board on 30
th
November 2025)
Clodagh Gunnigle
Non-Executive Director and Chair of RemCo
(Joined the Board on 22
nd
September 2025 and was
appointed the Chair of Remco role following Simon
Linares retirement in November 2025)
Robin Ashton
Non-Executive Director and Chair of the Board
Kerry Spooner
Non-Executive Director, Senior Independent
Director
Kavita Patel
Non-Executive Director
2025 performance and awards
The Chair’s Statement, Chief Executive’s Review and Strategic Report on
pages 4 to 7 describe 2025 as a period of disciplined consolidation and
strong performance despite volatile economic conditions. Nottingham
Building Society remained a top‑ten mutual with total assets of £5.4bn,
strengthening its foundations while embedding major technology and
operational investments. The Society sharpened its purpose around
specialist residential mortgages and continued to provide a safe, valued
home for savers. Capital ratios remained robust, supported by enhanced
funding resilience. Service quality also remained sector‑leading, with a 4.8
Trustpilot score from over 5,000 reviews, alongside national recognition for
transformation through the Change Excellence programme.
In this context, NBS is pleased to confirm its Annual Bonus Plan for 2025.
The bonus for 2025 is determined by the Society's financial and strategic
performance, as well as each employee's individual achievements.
Additionally, the existing Medium-Term Incentive Plan (‘MTIP’) was
replaced with a new MTIP that continues to support our EOB strategy and
engages and retains the leaders in charge of delivering it, whilst recognising
an enhanced focus on key programmes of investment. The new MTIP spans
a three-year performance period, with rigorous performance conditions
and benchmarks. The Directors’ variable compensation will be tied
exclusively to the Annual Bonus Plan and new MTIP.
It is in this context that the payments to Executive Directors have been
determined and are detailed in this report. In 2025, the Committee
reviewed and approved payment of the deferred element of the 2021
Bonus Plan.
Remuneration Committee
The primary objective of the RemCo, under delegated authority from the
Board, is to make recommendations to the Board on the general
Remuneration Policy of NBS and specifically on the remuneration of
Executive Directors and other Remuneration Code staff (including Material
Risk Takers), ensuring that remuneration is in line with the Society’s
business drivers, values and ambitions and adheres to the Remuneration
Policy. In addition, the Committee is responsible for approving the variable
pay, reward principles, compliance with the Remuneration Code and policy
statement.
The Committee is made up of a minimum of three Non-Executive Directors, as
detailed within the table above. The CEO, CPO, General Counsel & Society
Secretary attend the meetings by invitation.
NBS adheres to the requirements of the Remuneration Code applicable to a
Level 3 firm as defined by the Regulator. Non-Executive Directors do not receive
variable remuneration. Information on Nottingham Building Society’s other
Remuneration Code Staff is set out in the Pillar 3 disclosures published on our
website www.thenottingham.com, along with the Committee terms of
reference.
Committee activities
The Committee met five times in 2025, with activities including:
Remuneration
Policy
• Review of the Remuneration Policy for 2025 and
recommending it to the Board for approval;
• Reviewing and approving the Remuneration Policy
Statement ensuring its compliance with the
Remuneration Code; and
• Reviewing regulatory updates and assessing the
impact on NBS.
Fixed
Remuneration
• Oversight of the activities undertaken by the ExCo
in relation to reward;
• Considering the annual pay review for all eligible
employees;
• Agreeing the terms for any appointments and
leavers for executive level and other
Remuneration Code staff (including Material Risk
Takers);
• Consideration of additional provision of employer
pension contributions for all colleagues; and
•
Agreeing Financial Coaching Provision for all
colleagues.
Variable
Remuneration
• Agreeing the release of 2021 bonus deferrals;
• Agreeing a new Annual Bonus Plan for 2025; and
• Review of the MTIP.
RemCo intends to review the construct of the Annual Bonus Plan in 2026.
Remuneration Policy
NBS’s Remuneration Policy reflects its objectives for good governance,
appropriate risk management and acting in the long-term best interests of
members. The policy is there to ensure that:
• Remuneration should be sufficient to attract, reward, retain and motivate
high quality leaders and employees to run the Society successfully,
delivering value for our members whilst avoiding paying more than is
necessary for this purpose in line with our mutual ethos; and
• Remuneration is structured to strike the right balance between fixed and
variable pay. Variable pay schemes are designed to incentivise and reward
appropriate behaviour and performance, aligned with Nottingham
Building Society’s position on risk; rewards are only attributed to the
delivery of success and achievement of objectives.
NBS is classified as a level 3 firm and seeks to apply appropriate remuneration
best practice for all Remuneration Code staff and other staff.
All pay is benchmarked using externally provided data and the approach to pay
reviews is consistently applied to all colleagues across the Society, regardless
of position.
Recruitment policy for Executive Directors
NBS’s approach to recruitment is to remain competitive in the market while
ensuring we pay no more than is necessary to attract and retain the right talent
for roles across the business, including Executive positions. Any new Executive
Director’s remuneration package will be consistent with our Remuneration
Policy as outlined in this report. Any payments made to Executive Directors on
joining the Society to compensate them for forfeited remuneration from their
previous employer will be compliant with the provisions of the Remuneration
Code and will be approved by the RemCo.
Page | 38 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Director’s Remuneration Report
Service contracts
All Executive Directors, in line with best practice, have service contracts
outlining their duties and terms and conditions of employment. The CEO’s
contract is terminable at any time by the Society on 12 months’ notice and
by the CEO on 12 months’ notice. The contracts for the other Executive
Directors are terminable at any time by the Society on six months’ notice
and by the individual on six months’ notice. Unless notice to terminate is
given by either party, all contracts continue automatically.
Payment for loss of office of Executive Directors
Any compensation in the event of early termination is subject to RemCo
recommendation and Board approval. Pension contributions cease on
termination under the rules of the pension scheme.
Other directorships
None of the Executive Directors currently hold any paid external
directorships.
Executive Directors’ total remuneration
Executive Directors’ emoluments comprise a basic salary, variable pay,
entitlement and other taxable benefits as outlined on pages 39 to 40.
The total remuneration received by Executive Directors is detailed on page
40. The information has been audited and shows remuneration for the years
ended 31
st
December 2025 and 31
st
December 2024 as required under the
Building Societies (Accounts and Related Provisions) Regulations 1998.
The remuneration of Executive Directors is considered annually by the
RemCo attended by NBS’s CEO, who (except in respect of their own
remuneration) makes recommendations regarding executive pay and
agreed recommendations are referred to the Board.
The CEO is the Society’s highest paid employee and no employee earns
more than the CEO.
The salary of Executive Directors increased by 2.0% in 2025. This is in line
with the wider Society, with the basic salary increase for colleagues ranging
from 2.5% to 3.0% depending on grade, with minimum salaries
implemented to reflect the Living Wage.
Chief Executive Officer pay ratio
The CEO pay ratio is presented as follows to promote transparency and
encourage good governance. The CEO is the highest paid person within the
organisation, and this is compared with the 25
th
, 50
th
and 75
th
percentile
employees to calculate the CEO pay ratio. This uses a single total figure of
remuneration which includes total salary, variable pay, pension and taxable
benefits.
The Society has chosen to publish the CEO pay ratio using the recommended
and government preferred approach (Option A). Option A involves
calculating the actual full time equivalent remuneration for all relevant
employees for the financial year in question.
These values are then listed in order from lowest to highest and the values
at the three percentile points identified as disclosed below:
Year 25
th
percentile Median 75
th
percentile
2025 19:1 14:1 7:1
2024 21:1 15:1 8:1
25
th
percentile
Median 75
th
percentile
2025
Total remuneration £26,648 £37,873 £69,025
Salary £23,815 £34,028 £60,618
2024
Total remuneration £25,486 £35,034 £64,630
Salary £22,829 £31,130 £56,116
Employee data includes full time equivalent total remuneration for Society
employees as at 31
st
December.
Non-Executive Directors
The Chair and other Non-Executive Directors each receive an annual fee
reflective of the time commitment and responsibilities of the role. Fees for
Non-Executive Directors are set by reference to benchmark information
from a building society comparator group, agreed with the Board and take
into consideration the principles underpinning the annual salary review.
The Non-Executive Directors’ fees are reviewed by the Chair together with
the Executive Directors before recommendations are referred to the Board.
Remuneration of the Chair is considered by the RemCo, together with the
Society’s CEO, without the Chair being present.
Non-Executive Directors do not receive variable pay or pensions to
encourage their independence.
Non-Executive Directors are reimbursed for reasonable expenses incurred
during their work on the Society’s business.
Remuneration Code staff (Material risk takers)
The remuneration of all Remuneration Code staff is overseen directly by the
RemCo. Fixed and variable pay decisions (including appointment packages)
for Remuneration Code Staff (excluding the CIAO where the decision is
made by the Chair of the BAC and approved by the RemCo), are proposed
by the Executive and all decisions are recommended to the RemCo for
approval.
The Society’s Remuneration Code staff are informed of their status through
written communication. This communication includes the implications of
their status including the potential for remuneration that does not comply
with certain requirements of the Remuneration Code to be rendered void
and recoverable by the Society.
Page | 39 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Director’s Remuneration Report
Component Purpose Operation Performance measures Opportunity
Basic salary
Fixed remuneration set to
attract and retain
executives of appropriate
calibre and experience.
Basic salary is assessed by
reference to roles carrying
similar responsibilities in
comparable organisations. A
comparator group is used
that consists of Executive
Director positions within
banks and building societies
of a similar size and
complexity.
Reviewed annually and linked to personal
performance and market sector
benchmarking, including Willis Towers
Watson benchmark data.
Increases based on:
• Overall employee pay increases in the
Group;
• Benchmarking comparisons;
• Personal performance; and
• Role and experience.
The base salaries of Executive
Directors are reviewed as for any
other employee in accordance
with the reward matrix, except in
circumstances where:
•
market peer benchmarking
indicates that remuneration is
moving out of line of the
appropriate peer group; and /
or
•
there has been a material
increase in scope or
responsibility of the Executive
Director’s role.
Variable pay
Annual
Bonus Plan
Linked to the delivery of the
Society and personal
objectives. Used to reward
Executive Directors within
the context of achieving the
Society’s goals and
objectives.
Payments under the variable
pay schemes are not
pensionable.
The bonus will only be awarded if the
threshold criteria for both Society and
individual performance targets are met and
a payment is triggered in the Annual Bonus
Plan.
50% of the bonus is deferred for three years
and payment is subject to meeting Society
and individual performance threshold
criteria in each of the years from award to
payment.
The Committee has the discretion to reduce
or withhold the deferred element if it
becomes apparent that the basis on which
the variable pay award was made was
wrong or that financial performance has
deteriorated materially since the award.
The deferred payment, prior to the 2022
performance period, is subject to clawback
for a period of three years after payment.
For performance periods from 2022
onwards, the deferred payment is subject
to clawback for a period of 7 years after
payment.
The scheme is based upon three elements:
• Financial adequacy - achievement of a
minimum level of adjusted Profit Before
Tax before any bonus is payable.
• Annual Bonus Plan measures Society
performance against four strategic
pillars:
growing & rewarding membership;
responsible society;
strategic reinvention; and
safe & secure.
• Individual performance including
achievement of strategic objectives.
Personal performance objectives,
appropriate to the responsibilities of the
Executive Director, including the
achievement of appropriate strategic
progress are set at the start of each year.
Objectives are set within board risk appetite
and regulatory requirements.
The maximum award possible is
50% of basic salary, payable with
50% of the award deferred for
three years.
Variable pay
Medium-
term
Incentive
Plan (‘MTIP’)
One-off incentive used to
reward, engage and retain
Executive Directors to
deliver the Society’s
strategy.
Payments under the variable
pay schemes are not
pensionable.
The incentive will only be awarded if the
threshold criteria and Society performance
targets are met once the performance
period of three years (2025 to 2027) has
concluded.
50% of the incentive payment will be made
in March 2028 with the remaining 50%
deferred until September 2028. Payment is
subject to meeting Society and individual
performance threshold criteria from award
to payment.
The Committee has the discretion to reduce
or withhold the payment if it becomes
apparent that the basis on which the
variable pay award was made was wrong or
that financial performance has deteriorated
materially since the award.
The payment is subject to clawback for a
period of seven years after payment.
The scheme is based upon three elements:
• Financial adequacy - achievement of a
minimum level of adjusted underlying
Profit Before Tax before any incentive is
payable.
• MTIP measures performance against
the delivery of the Society’s strategic
objectives, focusing on three key
indicators:
net interest margin;
proportion of EOB lending; and
delivery of key programmes of
investment (including operational
resilience, core banking and lending
platform initiatives).
• Risk appetite - performance objectives
were set within board risk appetite and
regulatory requirements. Any payment
is subject to achieving the same risk
targets as the annual bonus plan for
plan years 2025, 2026 and 2027.
The maximum award possible is a
cash lump sum of £500,000 for
the CEO and £250,000 for the
other Executive Directors, payable
at the end of the performance
period in December 2027,
deferred 50% until March 2028
and 50% until September 2028.
Pension or
pension
allowance
A part of fixed remuneration
to attract and retain
Executives of appropriate
calibre and experience.
Executive Directors are invited to join the
Society’s defined contribution pension plan,
or, as an alternative, be provided with an
equivalent cash allowance.
Not applicable.
Pension contributions for new
Executive Directors appointed
post 1
st
January 2020 will be
aligned with the contribution
matrix for all employees.
Benefits
A part of fixed remuneration
to attract and retain
executives of appropriate
calibre and experience.
The benefits received by Executive
Directors are private medical insurance and
a car allowance.
Not applicable.
Set at a level considered
appropriate for each Executive
Director by the Remuneration
Committee in line with market
practice.
Page | 40 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Director’s Remuneration Report
Annual Report on remuneration
Executive Director remuneration
2025
2025
2025
2025
2024
2024
2024
2024
Audited
Sue
Hayes
Anthony
Murphy
Simon
Baum
Total
Sue
Hayes
Anthony
Murphy
Simon
Baum
Total
Society
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
Fixed remuneration
Salary
400
305
259
964
391
297
253
941
Benefits
11
29
12
52
11
29
12
52
Variable remuneration
Annual bonus
1
70
49
41
160
52
41
35
128
481
383
312
1,176
454
367
300
1,121
Pension contribution
-
11
-
11
-
15
-
15
Payments in lieu of pension
32
4
26
62
31
-
26
57
513
398
338
1,249
485 382 326 1,193
The Directors can sacrifice elements of their salary and variable pay for pension contributions. All figures disclosed in the table above are presented pre-sacrifice.
1
The annual bonus figure reflects the amounts awarded in the year, which are not subject to deferral, and any deferred amount from previous financial years,
paid in year. The remaining element, which is subject to deferral and the achievement of threshold criteria, will be disclosed in the year of payment.
The unpaid deferred elements of the annual bonus scheme are as follows:
Executive Directors
Due 2026
Due
2027
Due
2028
Due 2029
Total Deferred
Performance Year
2022
2023
2024
2025
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
Paul Astruc
40
10
-
-
50
Simon Baum
-
29
35
41
105
Sue Hayes
58
62
52
70
242
David Marlow
15
-
-
-
15
Anthony Murphy
-
46
41
49
136
113
147
128
160
548
Non-Executive Directors
2025 2024
£000
£000
Robin Ashton (Chair)
132
92
Simon Linares (Retired from the Board on 30
th
November)
65
70
Clodagh Gunnigle (Joined the Board on 22
nd
September 2025)
18
-
Peter O’Donnell
71
70
Kavita Patel
61
60
Kerry Spooner
88
95
Chris Sparks (Joined the Board on 1
st
March 2025)
57
-
Paul Astruc (retired from the Board on 6
th
April 2024)
-
15
Andrew Neden (retired from the Board on 1
st
July 2024)
-
87
Total emoluments for services as directors
492
489
Clodagh Gunnigle
Chair of the Remuneration Committee
4
th
March 2026
Page | 41 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Independent Auditor’s Report
Independent Auditor’s Report to the members of Nottingham Building Society
Opinion
In our opinion:
• the Financial Statements of Nottingham Building Society (the “Society”) and its subsidiaries (together the “Group”) give a true and fair view of the state of
the Group’s and the Society’s affairs as at 31 December 2025 and of the Group’s and the Society’s income and expenditure for the year then ended;
• the Financial Statements have been properly prepared in accordance with UK adopted international accounting standards; and
• the Financial Statements have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Building Societies Act 1986
We have audited the Financial Statements (as defined in the table below) of the Group and Society for the year ended 31 December 2025, which comprise:
Group Society
Income Statement for the year ended 31 December 2025 Income Statement for the year ended 31 December 2025
Statement of Comprehensive Income for the year ended 31 December 2025 Statement of Comprehensive Income for the year ended 31 December 2025
Statement of Financial Position for the year ended 31 December 2025 Statement of Financial Position as at 31 December 2025
Statement of Changes in Members’ Interests for the year ended 31 December
2025
Statement of Changes in Members’ Interests for the year ended 31 December
2025
Cash Flow Statements for the year ended 31 December 2025 Cash Flow Statement for the year ended 31 December 2025
Related notes 1 to 36 to the Financial Statements, including material accounting policy information.
Directors’ remuneration report tables identified as “audited”.
The financial reporting framework that has been applied in their preparation is applicable law and UK adopted international accounting standards.
Basis for opinion
We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing (UK) and applicable law. Our responsibilities under those standards are further
described in the Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the Financial Statements section of our report. We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is
sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our opinion.
Independence
We are independent of the Group and the Society in accordance with the ethical requirements that are relevant to our audit of the Financial Statements in the
UK, including the FRC’s Ethical Standard as applied to public interest entities, and we have fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities in accordance with these
requirements.
The non-audit services prohibited by the FRC’s Ethical Standard were not provided to the Group or the Society and we remain independent of the Group and the
Society in conducting the audit.
Conclusions relating to going concern
In auditing the Financial Statements, we have concluded that the Directors’ use of the going concern basis of accounting in the preparation of the Financial
Statements is appropriate. Our evaluation of the Directors’ assessment of the Group’s and the Society’s ability to continue to adopt the going concern basis of
accounting included the following procedures:
• We confirmed our understanding of the Directors’ going concern assessment process, including the Financial Statement Close Process.
• We obtained the Directors’ going concern assessment, which covers a period until 4
th
March 2027, being 12 months from the date of approval of the
Annual Report and Accounts.
• We compared the historical budgeted financial information with actual results, in order to form a view on the reliability of the forecasting process.
• We assessed the reasonableness of the Group and the Society’s funding plans, including capital and liquidity requirements. We considered the Group and
Society’s current funding position and availability of additional capital and liquidity should it be required. We also evaluated the Group and Society’s ability
to replace maturing debt instruments over the going concern period to manage regulatory capital requirements.
• We assessed the results of the Group’s stress and reverse stress testing, including considering the impact of ongoing macroeconomic uncertainty. We
evaluated the feasibility of Management’s planned future actions should stress scenarios materialise.
• We considered whether there were other events subsequent to the balance sheet date which could have a bearing on the going concern conclusion.
• We reviewed regulatory correspondence, committee and board meeting minutes, and met with the Prudential Regulation Authority, in order to identify
events or conditions that may impact the Group and Society’s ability to continue as a going concern.
• We reviewed the going concern disclosures included in the annual report in order to assess whether the disclosures were appropriate and in conformity
with the reporting standards.
Based on the work we have performed, we have not identified any material uncertainties relating to events or conditions that, individually or collectively, may cast
significant doubt on the Group’s and Society’s ability to continue as a going concern until 4 March 2027, being a period of 12 months from the data of approval of
the Annual Report and Accounts.
Page | 42 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Independent Auditor’s Report
In relation to the Group’s and the Society’s reporting on how they have applied the UK Corporate Governance Code, we have nothing material to add or draw
attention to in relation to the Directors’ statement in the Financial Statements about whether the directors considered it appropriate to adopt the going concern
basis of accounting.
Our responsibilities and the responsibilities of the Directors with respect to going concern are described in the relevant sections of this report. However, because
not all future events or conditions can be predicted, this statement is not a guarantee as to the Group’s and the Society’s ability to continue as a going concern.
Overview of our audit approach
Audit scope
• We performed an audit of the complete financial information of the Group and the Society
Key audit matters
• Expected credit loss provisions
• Risk of of fraud in recognition of income under Effective Interest Rate Accounting
Materiality
• Overall Group materiality of £2.0m (2024: £1.4m) which represents 0.75% (2024: 0.55%) of members’ interests.
An overview of the scope of the Society and the Group audits
Tailoring the scope
The Society is managed from one location in Nottingham. All audit work performed for the purposes of the audit was undertaken by a single audit team based in
the UK.
We have followed a risk-based approach when developing our audit approach to obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence on which to base our audit opinion.
We performed risk assessment procedures to identify and assess risks of material misstatement of the Group and Society Financial Statements and identified
significant accounts and disclosures. When identifying the extent to which audit work needed to be performed to respond to the identified risks of material
misstatement of the Group and Society Financial Statements, we considered our understanding of the Group and its business environment, the potential impact
of climate change, the applicable financial framework, the Group’s system of internal control at the entity level, applications and relevant internal audit results.
Our scoping to address the risk of material misstatement for each key audit matter is set out in the key audit matters section of our report.
Climate change
Stakeholders are increasingly interested in how climate change will impact the Group and the Society. The Group and Society has determined that the most
significant future impacts from climate change on their operations will be from physical and transition risks. These are explained on pages 18 to 20 in the
Sustainability Report, including their commitments to achieve net zero emissions by 2050. All of these disclosures form part of the “Other Information,” rather
than the audited Financial Statements. Our procedures on these unaudited disclosures therefore consisted solely of considering whether they are materially
inconsistent with the Financial Statements or our knowledge obtained in the course of the audit or otherwise appear to be materially misstated, in line with our
responsibilities on “Other Information”.
In planning and performing our audit we assessed the potential impacts of climate change on the Group and Society’s business and any consequential material
impact on its Financial Statements.
The Group and Society has explained in Note 1, Accounting policies, how they have reflected the impact of climate change in their Financial Statements. These
disclosures also explain where governmental and societal responses to climate change risks are still developing, and where the degree of certainty of these changes
means that they cannot be taken into account when determining asset and liability valuations under the requirements of UK adopted international accounting
standards.
Our audit effort in considering the impact of climate change on the Financial Statements was focused on evaluating management’s assessment of the impact of
climate risk, physical and transition, their climate commitments, the effects of material climate risks disclosed in Note 1 and whether these have been
appropriately reflected in asset and liability values, where these are impacted by future cash flows, following the requirements of UK adopted international
accounting standards. As part of this evaluation, we performed our own risk assessment, supported by our climate change specialists, to determine the risks of
material misstatement in the Financial Statements from climate change which needed to be considered in our audit.
We also challenged the Directors’ considerations of climate change risks in their assessment of going concern and associated disclosures. Where considerations
of climate change were relevant to our assessment of going concern, these are described above.
Based on our work, whilst we have not identified the impact of climate change on the Financial Statements to be a standalone key audit matter, we have
considered the impact of climate change to principally impact ‘Expected credit loss provisions’ key audit matter. Details of the impact, our procedures and
findings are included in our explanation of the expected credit loss provisions key audit matters below.
Key audit matters
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgment, were of most significance in our audit of the Financial Statements of the current period
and include the most significant assessed risks of material misstatement (whether or not due to fraud) that we identified. These matters included those which had
the greatest effect on: the overall audit strategy, the allocation of resources in the audit; and directing the efforts of the engagement team. These matters were
addressed in the context of our audit of the Financial Statements as a whole, and in our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on these
matters.
Page | 43 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Independent Auditor’s Report
Risk
Our response to the risk
Expected credit loss (“ECL”) provisions
As at 31 December 2025, the Group and Society reported gross loans and
advances to customers of £4,286.7m (2024: £4,239.8m) and related ECL
provisions of £4.6m (2024: £5.2m).
Refer to the Board Audit Committee Report (pages 35-36); Accounting
policies (pages 55 and 56); and Note 15 of the Consolidated Financial
Statements (page 64)
Valuation and completeness of expected credit loss (ECL) provisions is an
area of estimation that requires management judgement. The continuing
higher rate environment has an impact on the level of uncertainty in the
valuation of expected credit loss provisions, particularly in relation to the
application of macro-economic scenarios and the estimation of the
probability of default of customers in the future.
Key judgements and estimates include:
• Accounting interpretations and modelling assumptions used to build
the credit models and calculate the ECL.
• The appropriateness of staging criteria selected to determine
whether a significant increase in credit risk (“SICR”) has occurred.
• The application of multiple macro-economic scenarios including the
appropriateness of the probability weightings assigned to the various
scenarios.
• The completeness and valuation of post model adjustments.
There is also judgement in considering the potential consequences of climate
change and the impact of this on the ECL provision.
Due to the degree of judgement that needs to be exercised in determining
the key assumptions used in calculating ECL provisions, we considered this to
be a key audit matter. The heightened levels of estimation uncertainty also
gave rise to an increased risk of management override of controls.
We understood and evaluated the design effectiveness of key controls over the
ECL process and adopted a substantive approach.
With the support of EY credit risk modelling specialists, we risk assessed the
models used to generate the ECL provisions. Based on this risk assessment we
tailored our procedures, which included:
• Testing the appropriateness of the Society’s updated model methodology
through inspection of model design documentation.
• Independently replicating the Society’s modelled ECL as at 31 December
2025. This included recalculation of PDs, LGDs, EADs and overall ECL.
• Performing sensitivity analysis to determine the impact of changes in key
assumptions to the ECL provision.
• Benchmarking assumptions to observable market data where applicable.
We assessed whether the SICR criteria used by the Society provided appropriate
leading indicators of increased credit risk in the mortgage portfolio. With the
support of EY credit risk modelling specialists, we also independently tested
whether the mortgage portfolio had been appropriately staged in line with the
Society’s stated criteria.
With the support of EY economists, we assessed the base case and alternative
macro-economic scenarios through comparison to other scenarios from external
sources. This testing also included benchmarking of the probability weightings
used by the Society.
We assessed the completeness of post-
model adjustments, including
considerations to climate change risk, using our knowledge and experience
across the UK lending sector and with the involvement of our credit risk
modelling specialists we independently recalculated the additional ECL provision
adjustment applied by management.
We performed a stand-back analysis to assess the overall adequacy of the ECL
provisions. This included utilising our understanding of the Society and the UK
mortgage market to perform analytical procedures, assessing whether any
contradictory evidence had been obtained from other parts of the audit, and
considering the Society’s provision coverage ratios in comparison to other
lenders using available benchmarking data.
Key observations communicated to the Audit Committee
• We communicated that we were satisfied that the Society’s ECL provisions were reasonably estimated and in compliance with the requirements of IFRS 9.
• We highlighted to the Committee that there remains increased uncertainty in determining forecast losses due to the prevailing uncertain economic
environment.
• We considered that the application of staging criteria was materially appropriate and aligned to the requirements of IFRS 9.
• We considered the multiple economic scenarios, and associated weightings, incorporated in the IFRS 9 models to be materially appropriate.
Risk
Our response to the risk
Risk of fraud in the recognition of income under EIR (“EIR”) Accounting
As at 31 December 2025, the Group and Society reported gross loans and
advances to customers of £4,286.7m (2024: £4,239.8m) and related EIR
accounting adjustments of £9.2m (2024: £5.2m).
Refer to the Board Audit Committee Report (pages 35-36); Accounting policies
(pages 53 and 54); and Note 3 of the Consolidated Financial Statements (page
59)
The EIR method of revenue recognition involves management judgement and
several calculations in the allocation of lending fees and the amortisation of
these fees over the behavioural life of the underlying mortgage.
We understood and evaluated the design effectiveness of key controls over the
EIR accounting process and adopted a substantive approach.
We critically assessed the accounting policies in relation to revenue recognition
under IFRS 9 effective interest rate accounting.
We validated and challenged assumptions used in the EIR models, including the
accounting decisions and assumptions in relation to fees and charges, the
behavioural lives of assets and the allocation of lending fees to loan products.
Our challenge included a comparison of customer redemption assumptions
with recent customer behaviours observable in the Group’s portfolios, and an
assessment of the inclusion of lending fees within the EIR model.
We tested the accuracy of the EIR calculations by independently recalculating
the EIR adjustment as at 31 December 2025.
Page | 44 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Independent Auditor’s Report
The most sensitive inputs to the Society’s EIR accounting are driven by the
allocation of lending fees against relevant loan products , the behavioural life
assumption used for the deferral period for the fees, and estimations related
to future early redemption charges. These may be measured incorrectly due to
the use of inaccurate or incomplete data, erroneous formulae or inappropriate
assumptions.
Due to the degree of judgement that needs to be exercised by the Directors in
calculating the EIR adjustment, we considered this to be a key audit matter.
This also represents a risk of fraud in revenue recognition and through
management override of internal controls.
We performed data integrity testing on the key data fields used within the EIR
calculations by vouching a sample of data points through to supporting
evidence.
Key observations communicated to the Audit Committee
We communicated that we were satisfied that the selection and application of accounting policies, including the application of effective interest rate
accounting, was appropriate under the requirements of IFRS 9.
We concluded that the assumptions informing the EIR calculations as at 31 December 2025 were reasonable and that these resulted in EIR adjustments which
were appropriately derived from complete and accurate data.
In the prior year, our auditor’s report included a key audit matter in relation to the ‘Application of hedge accounting’. During the current period, we have
assessed the risk of material misstatement and considered those matters which were of most significance to our audit of the financial statements and no longer
consider this to be a key audit matter.
Page | 45 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Independent Auditor’s Report
Our application of materiality
We apply the concept of materiality in planning and performing the audit, in evaluating the effect of identified misstatements on the audit and in forming our audit
opinion.
Materiality
The magnitude of an omission or misstatement that, individually or in the aggregate, could reasonably be expected to influence the economic decisions of the users
of the Financial Statements. Materiality provides a basis for determining the nature and extent of our audit procedures.
We determined materiality for the Group and Society to be £2.0m (2024: £1.4m), which is 0.75% (2024: 0.55%) of total members’ interests. We increased the
percentage applied to total members' interests in the year based on a consideration of results of the Group and Society and benchmarking to relevant organisations.
We consider total members’ interests provides us with an appropriate measure of materiality given this is a key focus area for the Society’s members and regulators
and is more relevant to users in an uncertain economic environment where profitability and the temporary impact of matters impacting financial reporting is less
predictable.
Performance materiality
The application of materiality at the individual account or balance level. It is set at an amount to reduce to an appropriately low level the probability that the
aggregate of uncorrected and undetected misstatements exceeds materiality.
On the basis of our risk assessments, together with our assessment of the Group’s overall control environment, our judgement was that performance materiality
was 75% (2024: 75%) of our planning materiality, namely £1.5m (2024: £1.05m). We have set performance materiality at this percentage after considering our
experience in the prior year, our assessment of an effective control environment and including our perspectives from the current year audit. As a result, we
determined that the higher of our permissible thresholds for our performance materiality was appropriate.
Reporting threshold
An amount below which identified misstatements are considered as being clearly trivial.
We agreed with the Audit Committee that we would report to them all uncorrected audit differences in excess of £0.1m (2024: £0.07m), which is set at 5% of
planning materiality, as well as differences below that threshold that, in our view, warranted reporting on qualitative grounds.
We evaluate any uncorrected misstatements against both the quantitative measures of materiality discussed above and in light of other relevant qualitative
considerations in forming our opinion.
Other information
The Other Information comprises the information included in the Annual Report and Accounts set out on pages 2 to 40 and 94 to 97, including, Key highlights,
Chairman’s statement, Chief Executive’s review, Strategic Report, Stakeholder Engagement Report, Corporate Responsibility Report, Sustainability Report, Your
Board of Directors, Directors’ Report, Nomination Committee Report, Risk Management Report, Board Risk Committee Report, Corporate Governance Report,
Board Audit Committee Report, Directors’ Remuneration Report, Annual Business Statement and Glossary, other than the Financial Statements and our auditor’s
report thereon. The Directors are responsible for the Other Information contained within the annual report.
Our opinion on the Financial Statements does not cover the “Other Information” and, except to the extent otherwise explicitly stated in this report, we do not
express any form of assurance conclusion thereon.
Our responsibility is to read the “Other Information” and, in doing so, consider whether the other information is materially inconsistent with the Financial
Statements or our knowledge obtained in the course of the audit or otherwise appears to be materially misstated. If we identify such material inconsistencies or
apparent material misstatements, we are required to determine whether this gives rise to a material misstatement in the Financial Statements themselves. If,
based on the work we have performed, we conclude that there is a material misstatement of the other information, we are required to report that fact.
We have nothing to report in this regard.
Opinion on other matters prescribed by the Building Societies Act 1986
In our opinion:
• The Annual Business Statement and the Directors’ Report have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Building Societies Act 1986;
• the information given in the Directors’ Report for the financial year for which the Financial Statements are prepared is consistent with the Financial
Statements; and
• the information given in the Annual Business Statement (other than the information upon which we are not required to report) gives a true representation
of the matters in respect of which it is given.
Matters on which we are required to report by exception
We have nothing to report in respect of the following matters where the Building Societies Act 1986 requires us to report to you if, in our opinion:
• Proper accounting records have not been kept by the Society; or
• the Group or Society’s Financial Statements are not in agreement with the accounting records; or
• we have not received all the information and explanations and access to documents we require for our audit.
Page | 46 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Independent Auditor’s Report
Corporate Governance Statement
We have reviewed the Directors’ statement in relation to going concern, longer-term viability and that part of the Corporate Governance Statement relating to the
Group and the Society’s voluntary compliance with the provisions of the UK Corporate Governance Code specified for our review by the UK Listing Rules.
Based on the work undertaken as part of our audit, we have concluded that each of the following elements of the Corporate Governance Statement are materially
consistent with the Financial Statements or our knowledge obtained during the audit:
• Directors’ statement with regards to the appropriateness of adopting the going concern basis of accounting and any material uncertainties identified set
out on page 24;
• Directors’ explanation as to its assessment of the Society’s prospects, the period this assessment covers and why the period is appropriate set out on page
24;
• Directors’ statement on fair, balanced and understandable set out on page 24;
• Board’s confirmation that it has carried out a robust assessment of the emerging and principal risks set out on page 23;
• the section of the Annual Report that describes the review of effectiveness of risk management and internal control systems set out on page 24; and
• the section describing the work of the Audit Committee set out on page 35.
Directors’ Remuneration Report
The Society voluntarily prepares a Report of the directors on remuneration in accordance with the provisions of the Companies Act 2006. The directors have
requested that we audit the part of the Report of the directors on remuneration specified by the Companies Act 2006 to be audited as if the Society were a quoted
company.
In our opinion, the part of the directors’ remuneration report to be audited has been properly prepared in accordance with the Companies Act 2006.
Responsibilities of Directors
As explained more fully in the Directors’ responsibilities statement set out on pages 23 to 24 of the Annual Report and Accounts, the Directors are responsible for
the preparation of the Financial Statements and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair view, and for such internal control as the directors determine is
necessary to enable the preparation of financial statements that are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error.
In preparing the Financial Statements, the Directors are responsible for assessing the Group’s and the Society’s ability to continue as a going concern, disclosing,
as applicable, matters related to going concern and using the going concern basis of accounting unless the directors either intend to liquidate the Group or the
Society or to cease operations, or has no realistic alternative but to do so.
Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the Financial Statements
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the Financial Statements as a whole are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud
or error, and to issue an auditor’s report that includes our opinion. Reasonable assurance is a high level of assurance, but is not a guarantee that an audit conducted
in accordance with International Standards on Auditing (UK) will always detect a material misstatement when it exists. Misstatements can arise from fraud or error
and are considered material if, individually or in the aggregate, they could reasonably be expected to influence the economic decisions of users taken on the basis
of these financial statements.
Explanation as to what extent the audit was considered capable of detecting irregularities, including fraud
Irregularities, including fraud, are instances of non-compliance with laws and regulations. We design procedures in line with our responsibilities, outlined below,
to detect irregularities, including fraud. The risk of not detecting a material misstatement due to fraud is higher than the risk of not detecting one resulting from
error, as fraud may involve deliberate concealment by, for example, forgery or intentional misrepresentations, or through collusion. The extent to which our
procedures are capable of detecting irregularities, including fraud is detailed below.
However, the primary responsibility for the prevention and detection of fraud rests with both those charged with governance of the Group and management.
• We obtained an understanding of the legal and regulatory frameworks that are applicable to the Group and determined that the most significant are the
regulations, licence conditions and supervisory requirements of the Prudential Regulation Authority (PRA), the Financial Conduct Authority (FCA) and the
Building Societies Act 1986.
• We understood how Group and Society are complying with those frameworks by making enquiries of management, internal audit, and those responsible
for legal and compliance matters. We also reviewed correspondence between the Group and UK regulatory bodies; reviewed minutes of the Board and
Board Risk Committee; and gained an understanding of the Group’s approach to governance, demonstrated by the Board’s approval of the Group’s
governance framework and the Board’s review of the Group’s Operational Risk Framework and internal control processes.
• We assessed the susceptibility of the Group and the Society’s Financial Statements to material misstatement, including how fraud might occur by
considering the controls that the Group and Society have established to address risks identified by the entity, or that otherwise seek to prevent, deter or
detect fraud.
• Based on this understanding we designed our audit procedures to identify non-compliance with such laws and regulations. Our procedures involved
enquiries of legal counsel, executive management, internal audit, and focused testing as referred to in the Key Audit Matters section above.
• The Group and Society operate in the financial services sector which is a highly regulated environment. As such the Senior Statutory Auditor considered
the experience and expertise of the engagement team to ensure that the team had the appropriate competence and capabilities, which included the use
of specialists where appropriate.
A further description of our responsibilities for the audit of the Financial Statements is located on the
Financial Reporting Council’s website at https://www.frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities. This description forms part of our auditor’s report.
Page | 47 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Independent Auditor’s Report
Other matters we are required to address
• Following the recommendation from the Audit Committee, we were appointed by the Society on 24 March 2015 to audit the Financial Statements for the
year ending 31 December 2015 and subsequent financial periods.
• The period of total uninterrupted engagement including previous renewals and reappointments is eleven years, covering the years ending 31 December
2015 to 31 December 2025.
• The audit opinion is consistent with the additional report to the Audit Committee.
Use of our report
This report is made solely to the Society’s members, as a body, in accordance with Section 78 of the Building Societies Act 1986. Our audit work has been
undertaken so that we might state to the Society’s members those matters we are required to state to them in an auditor’s report and for no other purpose. To
the fullest extent permitted by law, we do not accept or assume responsibility to anyone other than the Society and the Society’s members as a body, for our
audit work, for this report, or for the opinions we have formed.
Blake Adlem (Senior Statutory Auditor)
for and on behalf of Ernst & Young LLP, Statutory Auditor
Edinburgh
4
th
March 2026
Page | 48 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Income Statements
for the years ended 31
st
December 2025 and 31
st
December 2024
The Income Statements only included income and expenditure from continuing operations.
The notes on pages 53 to 93 form part of these accounts.
Group
Group
Society
Society
2025
2024
2025
2024
Notes
£m
£m
£m
£m
Interest receivable and similar income
Calculated using the effective interest rate method
3
280.7
267.3
283.4
271.3
On derivatives not in a hedge accounting relationship
3
8.9
10.7
0.4
1.3
Interest receivable and similar income
289.6
278.0
283.8
272.6
Interest payable and similar charges
4
(202.9)
(194.4)
(199.2)
(189.0)
Net interest income
86.7
83.6
84.6
83.6
Fees and commissions receivable
1.8
2.0
1.8
2.0
Fees and commissions payable
(1.5)
(1.1)
(1.5)
(1.1)
Net (losses) / gains from derivative financial instruments
5
(3.0)
3.9
4.7
7.4
Total net income
84.0
88.4
89.6
91.9
Administrative expenses
6
(63.1)
(59.4)
(62.6)
(59.2)
Depreciation and amortisation
17,18,19
(4.8)
(4.9)
(4.8)
(4.9)
Operating profit before impairment and other non-operating items
16.1
24.1
22.2
27.8
Impairment credit - loans and advances to members
15
0.4
-
0.4
-
Voluntary payment expense associated with Philips Trust Corporation
27
0.4
(11.2)
0.4
(11.2)
Recoveries against Philips Trust Corporation expense
27
0.1
1.0
0.1
1.0
Movement in Equity Investment Fair Value
(1.1)
-
(1.1)
-
Profit on disposal of freehold land and buildings
0.8
-
0.8
-
Profit before tax
16.7
13.9
22.8
17.6
Tax charge
8
(6.0)
(4.6)
(6.0)
(4.6)
Profit after tax for the financial year
10.7
9.3
16.8
13.0
Page | 49 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Statement of Comprehensive Income
for the years ended 31
st
December 2025 and 31
st
December 2024
Group
Group
Society
Society
2025
2024
2025
2024
Notes
£m
£m
£m
£m
Profit for the financial year
10.7
9.3
16.8
13.0
Items that will not be re-classified to the Income Statement
Remeasurements of defined benefit obligation
28
-
0.9
-
0.9
Revaluation of freehold land and buildings
2.8
-
2.8
-
Tax on items that will not be re-classified
8
(0.1)
(0.2)
(0.1)
(0.2)
Items that may subsequently be re-classified to the Income Statement
Fair Value through Other Comprehensive Income reserve
Valuation (losses) / gains taken to reserves
12
(2.0)
(0.5)
(2.0)
(0.5)
Amounts transferred to the Income Statement on micro hedge
2.0
0.3
2.0
0.3
relationships
Tax on items that may subsequently be reclassified
8
-
-
-
-
Other comprehensive income for the year net of income tax
2.7
0.5
2.7
0.5
Total comprehensive income for the year
13.4
9.8
19.5
13.5
Both the profit for the financial year and total comprehensive income for the year are attributable to the members of the Society.
The Notes on pages 53 to 93 form part of these accounts.
Page | 50 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Statements of Financial Position
as at 31
st
December 2025 and 31
st
December 2024
Group
Group
Society
Society
2025 2024 2025 2024
Notes
£m
£m
£m
£m
Assets
Cash in hand and balances with the Bank of England
9
297.0
441.2
297.0
441.2
Loans and advances to credit institutions
10
69.3
21.6
40.1
12.4
Debt securities
12
704.8
454.2
704.8
454.2
Derivative financial instruments
13
29.4
80.9
25.6
69.5
Loans and advances to members
14
4,305.0
4,201.8
4,305.0
4,201.8
Convertible loan notes
-
1.1
-
1.1
Amounts due from subsidiary undertakings
16
-
-
77.4
33.4
Other assets
5.8
6.7
5.8
5.3
Property, plant and equipment
17
11.4
8.0
11.4
8.0
Right of use assets
18
1.9
2.0
1.9
2.0
Intangible assets
19
11.2
8.8
11.2
8.8
Deferred tax assets
20
0.5
0.4
0.5
0.4
Total assets
5,436.3
5,226.7
5,480.7
5,238.1
Liabilities
Shares
21
4,631.2
4,350.5
4,631.2
4,350.5
Amounts owed to credit institutions
22
0.1
327.1
0.1
327.1
Amounts owed to other members
23
56.5
45.4
56.5
45.4
Amounts owed to subsidiary undertakings
24
-
-
457.7
208.2
Debt securities in issue
25
408.9
184.7
-
-
Derivative financial instruments
13
31.2
22.9
31.2
22.9
Other liabilities and accruals
26
10.9
13.2
10.8
11.7
Lease liabilities
18
2.2
2.4
2.2
2.4
Provisions for liabilities
27
1.0
2.0
1.0
2.0
Current tax liabilities
3.6
1.2
3.6
1.2
Retirement benefit obligations
28
-
-
-
-
Subscribed capital
29
24.0
24.0
24.0
24.0
Total liabilities
5,169.6
4,973.4
5,218.3
4,995.4
Reserves
General reserve
264.0
253.3
259.6
242.7
Fair value reserve
30
-
-
-
-
Revaluation reserve
2.7
-
2.7
-
Total reserves attributable to members of the Society
266.7
253.3
262.3
242.7
Total reserves and liabilities
5,436.3
5,226.7
5,480.6
5,238.1
Society
The Notes on pages 53 to 93 form part of these accounts.
These accounts were approved by the Board of Directors on 4
th
March 2026 and signed on its behalf by:
Robin Ashton Sue Hayes Anthony Murphy
Chair Chief Executive Officer Chief Financial Officer
Page | 51 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Statement of Changes in Members’ Interests
for the years ended 31
st
December 2025 and 31
st
December 2024
The Notes on pages 53 to 93 form part of these accounts.
General
Reserve
Fair value
reserve
Revaluation
Reserve
Total
Group 2025
£m
£m
£m
£m
Balance as at 1
st
January 2025
253.3
-
-
253.3
Profit for the year
10.7
-
-
10.7
Other comprehensive income for the year (net of tax)
Net gains from changes in fair value
-
-
2.7
2.7
Total other comprehensive income
-
-
2.7
2.7
Total comprehensive income for the year
10.7
-
2.7
13.4
Balance as at 31
st
December 2025
264.0
-
2.7
266.7
Group 2024
Balance as at 1
st
January 2024
243.3
0.2
-
243.5
Profit for the year
9.3
-
-
9.3
Other comprehensive income for the year (net of tax)
Net gains / (losses) from changes in fair value
0.7
(0.2)
-
0.5
Total other comprehensive income
0.7
(0.2)
-
0.5
Total comprehensive income / (expense) for the year
10.0
(0.2)
-
9.8
Balance as at 31
st
December 2024
253.3
-
-
253.3
Society 2025
Balance as at 1
st
January 2025
242.7
-
-
242.7
Profit for the year
16.8
-
-
16.8
Other comprehensive income for the year (net of tax)
Net gains from changes in fair value
-
-
2.7
2.7
Total other comprehensive income - - 2.7 2.7
Total comprehensive income for the year
16.8
-
2.7
19.5
Balance as at 31
st
December 2025
259.5
-
2.7
262.2
Society 2024
Balance as at 1
st
January 2024
229.0
0.2
-
229.2
Profit for the year
13.0
-
-
13.0
Other comprehensive income for the year (net of tax)
Net gains / (losses) from changes in fair value
0.7
(0.2)
-
0.5
Total other comprehensive income / (expense)
0.7
(0.2)
-
0.5
Total comprehensive income / (expense) for the year
13.7
(0.2)
-
13.5
Balance as at 31
st
December 2024
242.7
-
-
242.7
Page | 52 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Cash Flow Statements
for the years ended 31
st
December 2025 and 31
st
December 2024
Group
Group
Society
Society
2025
2024
2025
2024
Notes
£m
£m
£m
£m
Cash flows from operating activities
Profit before tax from continuing operations
16.7
13.9
22.8
17.6
Depreciation and amortisation
4.8
5.1
4.8
5.1
Profit on disposal of freehold land and buildings
(0.8)
-
(0.8)
-
Interest on subscribed capital
34
1.9
1.9
1.9
1.9
Interest on lease payments
18
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
Amortisation of discounts and premiums on debt securities
(0.1)
-
(0.1)
-
Impairment credit - loans and advances to members
15
(0.4)
-
(0.4)
-
22.2
21.0
28.3
24.7
Changes in operating assets and liabilities
(Increase) / decrease in loans and advances to credit institutions
(26.5)
8.8
(27.3)
9.8
Increase in loans and advances to members
(102.8)
(657.9)
(102.8)
(657.9)
Movement in equity investment
1.1
-
1.1
-
Decrease / (increase) in other assets
50.4
22.9
290.9
(38.2)
Increase in amounts owed by Group undertakings
-
-
(44.0)
-
Increase in shares
21
280.7
784.6
280.7
784.6
(Decrease) / increase in amounts owed to other credit institutions and
other members
22,23
(315.9)
35.6
(315.9)
35.6
Increase / (decrease) in debt securities in issue
25
224.2
(61.5)
-
-
Increase / (decrease) in accruals and other liabilities
5.0
(17.2)
6.4
(18.5)
Movement in retirement benefit obligation
28
-
(0.6)
-
(0.6)
Taxation paid
(3.5)
-
(3.5)
-
Net cash generated from operating activities
134.8
135.7
113.9
139.5
Cash flows from investing activities
Purchase of convertible loan note
-
(1.1)
-
(1.1)
Purchase of debt securities
12
(488.9)
(268.1)
(488.9)
(268.1)
Disposal of debt securities
12
240.2
153.5
240.2
153.5
(Disposal) / purchase of property, plant and equipment
(0.9)
(0.7)
(0.9)
(0.7)
Purchase of intangible assets
19
(5.8)
(6.5)
(5.8)
(6.5)
Net cash used in investing activities
(255.4)
(122.9)
(255.4)
(122.9)
Cash flows from financing activities
Interest paid on subscribed capital
34
(1.9)
(1.9)
(1.9)
(1.9)
Principal element of lease payments
(0.5)
(0.5)
(0.5)
(0.5)
Net increase
(123.0)
10.4
(143.9)
14.2
Cash and cash equivalents at 1
st
January
449.6
439.1
441.3
427.1
Cash and cash equivalents at 31
st
December
11
326.6
449.5
297.4
441.3
Total interest received was £203.9m (2024: £165.9m) and total interest paid was £161.4m (2024: £13 3.5m).
The Notes on pages 53 to 93 form part of these accounts.
Page | 53 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Notes to the Accounts
for the years ended 31
st
December 2025 and 31
st
December 2024
1 Accounting policies
The principal accounting policies adopted in the preparation of these
Financial Statements are set out below.
Basis of preparation
Both the Society and Group Annual Accounts are prepared and approved by
the Directors in accordance with UK adopted international accounting
standards (‘IAS’) and those parts of the Building Societies Act 1986 and
Building Societies (Accounts and Related Provisions) Regulations 1998
applicable to societies reporting under UK adopted IAS. The Annual
Accounts are prepared under the historical cost convention, modified for
assets and liabilities held at fair value.
The Financial Statements are prepared in pounds sterling, which is the
functional currency of the Group, and have been rounded to the nearest
one hundred thousand pounds.
Governmental and societal responses to climate change risks are still
developing, and are interdependent upon each other, and consequently
Financial Statements cannot capture all possible future outcomes as these
are not yet known nor capable of reasonable estimation. The degree of
uncertainty of these changes may also mean that they cannot be
conclusively considered when determining asset and liability valuations and
the timing of future cash flows under the requirements of applicable
accounting standards. At 31
st
December 2025, the Group considers its
present financial exposure to climate-related risk to the best of its
knowledge to be immaterial, including with respect of the climate change
commitments made in the Sustainability Report on pages 18 to 20. As such,
no material adjustments have been made to the valuation of assets and
liabilities in these Financial Statements.
The Directors have considered the risks and uncertainties discussed on
pages 13 to 15 and 26 to 30, and the extent to which they might affect the
preparation of the Annual Report and Accounts on a going concern basis.
Key to this consideration were the risks associated to regulatory capital,
liquidity and financial performance, together with the potential effects of
prevailing interest rates, inflationary pressures and climate-related factors.
As with many other financial institutions, the Group meets its day-to-day
liquidity requirements through prudent management of its retail and
wholesale funding sources. It ensures that it maintains sufficient liquidity to
meet both normal business demands and those that may arise in stressed
circumstances.
The Group has a surplus to regulatory capital requirements and is
forecasting this to remain across the going concern assessment
period. Furthermore the Group’s forecasts and plans, taking account of
current and possible future operating conditions, including stress tests and
scenario analysis, which have considered income, expenses and overall
quality of the mortgage portfolio, indicate that the Group has sufficient
operating liquidity and capital for the foreseeable future, and specifically for
the going concern assessment period to 4
th
March 2027 – twelve months
from the date of the approval of the Annual Report and Accounts. As such,
the Directors are satisfied that the Group has adequate resources to
continue in business and to use the going concern basis in preparing the
accounts.
The accounting policies for the Group also include those for the Society
unless otherwise stated.
The preparation of accounts in conformity with UK adopted IAS requires
management to make judgements, estimates and assumptions that affect
the application of policies and reported amounts of assets and liabilities,
income and expenses. These estimates and assumptions are based on
historical experience and various other factors that are believed to be
reasonable under the circumstances. Although these estimates are based
on Management’s best knowledge of the amount, event or actions, actual
results may differ from those estimates.
Changes in accounting policy
There are no newly issued standards or amendments effective in 2025 that
have a material impact on the Group’s accounting policies.
During the year, NBS changed its accounting policy for freehold land and
buildings from the cost model to the revaluation model in accordance with
IAS 16 Property, Plant and Equipment, to reflect the market value of these
assets on the Balance Sheet, thereby increasing capital to support future
investment and growth. Previously, these assets were carried at cost less
accumulated depreciation and impairment. Under the new policy, they are
measured at fair value, determined by periodic professional valuations, less
subsequent depreciation.
The initial application of the revaluation model is treated as a revaluation
under IAS 16 rather than as a change in accounting policy under IAS 8.
Accordingly, the change has been applied prospectively from the date of
revaluation being 31
st
July 2025 and prior-year comparative figures have not
been restated. The resulting increase in carrying amount has been
recognised in equity through the revaluation reserve. Disposals of freehold
land and buildings completed prior to 31
st
July 2025 have been accounted
for under the cost model, with any resulting profit or loss on disposal
recognised in the Income Statement.
Future accounting developments
The following amendments and improvements to accounting standards
have been issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (‘IASB’):
• Effective 1
st
January 2026 - amendments to IFRS 9 and IFRS 7:
amendments clarify the requirements for recognition and
derecognition of financial assets and liabilities, and in particular
clarify that a financial liability is derecognised on the ‘settlement
date’. The amendments also introduce an accounting policy choice
(if specific conditions are met) to derecognise financial liabilities
settled using an electronic payment system before the settlement
date; and
• Effective 1
st
January 2027 - amendments to IFRS 18 will reshape the
Income Statement by introducing new mandatory subtotals, defining
categories for income / expenses and strengthen aggregation /
disaggregation principles to enhance clarity and comparability.
Basis of consolidation
Subsidiary companies are defined as those in which the Society has the
power over relevant activities, has exposure, or rights, to variable returns
and has the ability to affect returns.
Subsidiaries are consolidated from the date on which control is transferred
to the Group and de-consolidated from the date that control ceases. The
Group’s accounts consolidate the assets, liabilities and results of the Society
and all its subsidiaries, eliminating intercompany balances and transactions.
All entities have accounting periods ending on 31
st
December. The results of
subsidiary undertakings acquired or disposed of during the year are
included in the Consolidated Income Statement from the effective date of
acquisition or up to the effective date that ownership ceases.
Special purpose funding vehicle
The Society has transferred the beneficial interest in certain loans and
advances to members to two Special Purpose Funding Vehicles (‘SPVs’).
These SPVs enable a subsequent raising of debt to investors who gained the
security of the underlying assets as collateral. The SPVs are fully
consolidated into the Group’s accounts in accordance with IFRS 10 as the
Society is deemed to have control over the SPVs.
The transfer of the beneficial interest in these loans to each SPV is not
treated as sales by the Society. The Society continues to recognise these
assets within its own Statement of Financial Position after the transfer
because it retains substantially all the risk and rewards of the portfolio
through the receipt of the majority of profits of the structured entity. In the
accounts of the Society, the proceeds received from the transfer are
accounted for as a deemed loan repayable to each SPV, which is held at
amortised cost.
Interest income and expense
Interest income and interest expense for all interest-bearing financial
instruments are recognised in ‘interest receivable and similar income’ or
‘interest payable and similar charges’.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page | 54 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Notes to the Accounts
for the years ended 31
st
December 2025 and 31
st
December 2024
1 Accounting policies (continued)
The Effective Interest Rate (‘EIR’) method is applied to all financial assets
and financial liabilities measured at amortised cost and to all interest
bearing financial assets measured at Fair Value through Other
Comprehensive Income (‘FVOCI’). Interest income on these financial assets
is presented in interest receivable calculated using the effective interest
rate method, together with the amortisation of fair value hedge
adjustments. The effective interest rate is the rate that discounts the
expected future cash flows, over the expected life of the financial
instrument, to the net carrying amount of the financial asset or liability. This
may include fees and commissions if they are an integral part of the
effective interest rate of a financial instrument.
Interest income on financial assets is calculated by applying the EIR to the
gross carrying amount of the financial asset, unless considered credit
impaired. When a financial asset becomes credit impaired, and therefore
considered as Stage 3, interest income is calculated by applying the EIR to
the net amortised cost of the financial asset. If the financial asset cures and
is no longer credit impaired, interest income is reverted to being calculated
on a gross basis.
Interest income and expense also includes interest on derivatives measured
at Fair Value through Profit and Loss (‘FVPL’), where hedge accounting is not
applied, using the contractual interest rate.
Fees and commissions
Fees receivable are generally recognised when all performance obligations
of the contract have been fulfilled.
Commission receivable from the sale of third-party products is recognised
upon fulfilment of contractual performance obligations, that is the
inception date of the product or on completion of a mortgage.
If the fees are an integral part of the effective interest rate of a financial
instrument, they are recognised as an adjustment to the effective interest
rate and recorded in interest receivable / payable.
Fees payable are recognised on an accruals basis when the service has been
provided or on the completion of an act to which the fee relates.
Cash and cash equivalents
For the purposes of the cash flow statement, cash and cash equivalents
comprise cash, treasury bills, other eligible bills, and loans and advances to
credit institutions with original maturities of less than three months from
the date of acquisition. Cash equivalents are defined as short‑term, highly
liquid investments that are readily convertible to known amounts of cash,
are held for the purpose of meeting short‑term cash commitments, and are
subject to an insignificant risk of changes in value.
Derivative financial instruments and hedge accounting
The Group uses derivatives only for risk management purposes. It does not
use derivatives for trading purposes. Derivatives are measured at fair value
in the Statement of Financial Position. Fair values are obtained by applying
quoted market rates to a discounted cash flow model. All derivatives are
carried as assets when fair value is positive and as liabilities when fair value
is negative.
The Group has elected to continue to apply the hedge accounting
requirements of IAS 39 on adoption of IFRS 9 for macro fair value hedge
accounting associated with fixed rate mortgages and savings accounts. The
Group applies IFRS 9 for micro fair value hedge accounting to fixed rate
treasury assets.
The Group looks to designate derivatives held for risk management
purposes as hedging instruments in qualifying hedging relationships. On
initial designation of the hedge, the Group documents formally the
relationship between the hedging instruments and adjustments to hedged
items, including the risk management objective and strategy in undertaking
the hedge, together with the method that will be used to assess the
effectiveness of the hedging relationship. The Group makes an assessment,
both at the inception of the hedge relationship as well as on an ongoing
basis, as to whether the hedging instruments are expected to be highly
effective in offsetting the changes in the fair value of the respective hedged
items during the period for which the hedge is designated, and whether the
actual results of each hedge are within a range of 80-125 percent.
If derivatives are not designated as hedges, then changes in their fair values
are recognised immediately in the Income Statement in the period in which
they arise.
Portfolio fair value hedges
Portfolio fair value hedges are used to hedge exposures to variability in the
fair value of financial assets and liabilities, such as fixed rate mortgages and
savings products. Changes in the fair value of derivatives are recognised
immediately in the Income Statement together with changes in the fair
value of the hedged item that are attributable to the hedged risk (in the
same line in the Income Statement as the hedged item).
If the hedging derivative expires or is sold, terminated, or exercised, or the
hedge no longer meets the criteria for fair value hedge accounting, or the
hedge designation is revoked, hedge accounting is discontinued
prospectively. Any adjustment up to that point to a hedge item, for which
the effective interest method is used, is amortised to the Income Statement
over its remaining life.
Financial assets
Classification and Measurement
Financial assets comprise cash, loans and advances to credit institutions,
debt securities, derivative financial instruments and loans and advances to
members. The Group classifies non-derivative financial assets as either
amortised cost, FVOCI or FVPL depending on the business model for
managing the assets and the contractual cash flow characteristics. The
Group determines its business model at the level that best reflects how it
manages groups of assets to achieve its business objective. In making this
assessment it considers how the performance of the business model is
evaluated and reported within the Group, how the risks of the business
model are managed and the expected frequency, value and timing of sales
of assets. The contractual terms of the financial assets are assessed to
determine whether their cash flows represent solely payments of principal
and interest or expose the Group to other risks.
Amortised cost
Financial assets whose business model is to hold for collection of
contractual cash flows where those cash flows represent Solely Payments
of Principal and Interest (‘SPPI’) are measured at amortised cost. Interest
income from these financial assets is included in net interest income using
the effective interest rate method. Any gain or loss arising on derecognition
is recognised directly in profit or loss. The carrying value of these assets is
adjusted by any expected credit loss allowance recognised.
The Society classifies the following financial instruments as amortised cost:
• cash in hand and balances with the Bank of England;
• loans and advances to credit institutions; and
• loans and advances to members.
Loans and advances to members
The initial value of loans and advances to members may, if applicable,
include certain upfront costs and fees such as procuration fees, legal fees,
valuation fees, mortgage indemnity guarantee premiums and application
fees, which are recognised over the expected life of mortgage assets.
Mortgage discounts are also recognised over the expected life of mortgage
assets as part of the effective interest rate.
Throughout the year and at each year end, the mortgage life assumptions
are reviewed for appropriateness. Any changes to the expected life
assumptions of the assets are recognised through interest receivable and
similar income and reflected in the carrying value of the mortgage assets.
Included in loans and advances to members of the Society are balances
which have been used to secure funding issued by the Group’s special
purpose vehicles, which are consolidated into the Group’s Financial
Statements. The beneficial interest in the underlying loans has been
transferred to these entities. The loans are retained within the Society’s
Statement of Financial Position as the Society retains substantially all of the
risks and rewards relating to the loans.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page | 55 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Notes to the Accounts
for the years ended 31
st
December 2025 and 31
st
December 2024
1 Accounting policies (continued)
Fair value through other comprehensive income
NBS recognises its debt securities as FVOCI assets. The business model for
these financial assets is to hold for collection of contractual cash flows and
for selling the financial assets, where the assets’ cash flows represent solely
payments of principal and interest and are measured at FVOCI. Fair value
movements are recognised in OCI, while interest income and ECLs are
recognised in profit or loss. When the financial asset is derecognised, the
cumulative gain or loss previously recognised in OCI is reclassified from
reserves to the Income Statement. Interest income from these financial
assets is included in net interest income using the effective interest rate
method. The expected credit loss for these assets does not reduce the
carrying amount in the Statement of Financial Position, which remains at
fair value. Instead, an amount equal to the allowance that would arise if the
assets were at amortised cost, is recognised in OCI as an accumulated
impairment amount, with a corresponding charge to profit or loss.
Fair value through profit or loss
Assets that do not meet the criteria for amortised cost or FVOCI are
measured at FVPL. Interest income from these financial assets is included in
net interest income, within ‘on derivatives not in a hedge accounting
relationship’. The Society recognises its derivative financial instruments,
equity investments and convertible loan notes as FVTPL assets.
Impairment of financial assets not carried at FVTPL
Under IFRS 9, the Group assesses on a forward-looking basis the Expected
Credit Losses (‘ECL’) associated with its financial assets carried at amortised
cost and FVOCI and with the exposure arising from loan commitments. The
allowance is based on the ECLs associated with the probability of default in
the next 12-months unless there has been a significant increase in credit risk
since origination and the measurement of ECL reflects:
• an unbiased and probability weighted amount that is determined by
evaluating a range of possible outcomes;
• the time value of money; and
• reasonable and supportable information that is available without
undue cost or effort at the reporting date about past events, current
conditions and forecasts of future economic conditions.
IFRS 9 outlines a ‘three-stage’ model for impairment based on changes in
credit quality since initial recognition as summarised below:
• Stage 1: a financial instrument that is not credit-impaired on initial
recognition and its credit risk has not significantly increased since
origination. ECL is measured at an amount equal to the portion of
lifetime expected credit losses that result from default events possible
within the next 12-months.
• Stage 2: if a significant increase in credit risk (‘SICR’) since initial
recognition is identified, the financial asset is moved to ‘Stage 2’ but is
not yet deemed to be credit impaired. The definition of a significant
increase in credit risk is detailed below. ECL for Stage 2 assets are
measured based on expected credit losses on a lifetime basis.
• Stage 3: if the financial asset is credit-impaired, it is moved to ‘Stage 3’.
The definition of credit-impaired and default is outlined below. ECL for
Stage 3 assets is also measured on expected credit losses on a lifetime
basis.
Forward-looking information is considered in the measurement of ECL with
its use of economic assumptions such as inflation, unemployment rates,
house price indices and Gross Domestic Product (‘GDP’).
The Group has no purchased or originated credit impaired assets.
Significant Increase in Credit Risk (‘SICR’)
The Group considers a financial instrument to have experienced a significant
increase in credit risk when one or more of the following criteria has been
met:
Financial instrument
Definition of significant increase in credit risk
Loans and
advances
to
•
over 30 days past due on contractual repayments;
members - Retail
•
change
in
Probability
of
Default
(‘PD’)
exceeds
relative
threshold of 100% and absolute threshold of 0.5%; or
•
in forbearance.
Loans and advances to
•
over 30 days past due on contractual repayments;
members – Secured
•
change
in
PD
exceeds
relative
threshold
of
100%
and
Business Lending absolute threshold of 0.5%; or
•
in forbearance.
Wholesale
liquidity
•
any arrears or receipt of adverse information.
instruments
Definition of default and credit-impaired
The Group defines a financial asset as in default, which is fully aligned with
the definition of credit-impaired, when it is more than 90-days past due on
contractual repayments.
It is the Society’s policy to consider a financial instrument as ‘cured’ and
therefore reclassified out of Stage 3 when none of the default criteria have
been present for at least twelve consecutive months for forbearance
defaults and nine months for any other defaults. The decision whether to
classify an asset as Stage 2 or Stage 1 once cured depends on the updated
position, at the time of the cure, and whether there has been a significant
increase in credit risk compared to initial recognition.
Loans and advances to members
Forward-looking information incorporated in the ECL models
The assessment of SICR and the calculation of ECL both incorporate
forward-looking information. Forecasts of these economic variables are
provided by a reputable third party on a regular basis and provide the best
estimate view of the economy over the next five years. After five years, to
project the economic variables out for the full remaining lifetime, a mean
reversion approach is used, i.e. long-run averages. In addition to the Base
economic scenario forecast, other possible scenarios along with scenario
weightings are obtained, of which management has applied four (2024:
four) scenarios in the model calculations to align with wider market
practices. Further details of these scenarios are outlined in Note 15.
ECL models
The ECL models are driven by three key components:
• Probability of Default: the PD model takes attributes of the mortgage
accounts on the portfolio (for example, origination vintage and time on
book) and adjusts for the impacts of a range of independently sourced
forward-looking macroeconomic scenarios to produce a vector detailing
the likelihood of an account defaulting in a given month within the
expected behavioural lifetime. The model outputs are scaled against a
number of internal risk grades which are determined using the Society’s
behavioural scoring models. These behavioural scoring models contain a
combination of internal and externally derived data to rank the mortgage
accounts by risk and pool the accounts into groups of comparable
expected performance.
• Exposure at Default (‘EAD’): the EAD model predicts the loan exposure
of each mortgage account at a future default date. The model takes into
account balance amortisation and accrued interest from missed
payments given expected changes in the repayment terms of the
mortgage; for example interest rates may move in a manner consistent
with the macroeconomic scenarios. The calculation produces a vector to
represent ‘expected’ EAD at each potential point of default along the
vector from the reporting date up to the expected behavioural lifetime;
and
• Loss Given Default ('LGD’): the LGD model calculates the likely loss on
asset disposal that the Society would suffer if a default were to occur in
any given month over the expected behavioural lifetime of the mortgage
account. LGD takes into account the EAD in comparison to the value
expected to be recovered through the sale of an asset, given the
macroeconomic scenario specific trend in property price indices. The
expectation of loss is then scaled to reflect the likelihood of a mortgage
account reaching default, progressing on to sale of the asset.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page | 56 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Notes to the Accounts
for the years ended 31
st
December 2025 and 31
st
December 2024
1 Accounting policies (continued)
Forbearance strategies and renegotiated loans
A range of forbearance options are available to support members who are
in financial difficulty. The purpose of forbearance is to support members
who have temporary financial difficulties and help them get back on their
feet. The main options offered by the Society include:
• reduced monthly payment;
• an arrangement to clear outstanding arrears;
• temporary interest only; and
• extension of mortgage term.
Members requesting a forbearance option will need to provide information
to support the request which is likely to include a budget planner, statement
of assets and liabilities, bank / credit card statements, payslips etc. in order
that the request can be properly assessed. If the forbearance request is
granted the account is monitored in accordance with our policy and
procedures. At the appropriate time the forbearance option that has been
implemented is cancelled, except for capitalisation of arrears, and the
customer’s normal contractual payment is restored.
Loans that are subject to restructuring may only be classified as restructured
and up to date once a specified number and / or amount of qualifying
payments have been received. These qualifying payments are set at a level
appropriate to the nature of the loan and the member’s ability to make the
repayment going forward. Typically, the receipt of six months’ qualifying
payments is required. Loans that have been restructured and would
otherwise have been past due or impaired are classified as renegotiated.
The carrying amount of loans that have been classified as renegotiated
retain this classification until maturity or derecognition. Interest is recorded
on renegotiated loans based on new contractual terms following
renegotiation. The original effective interest rate will be retained.
Modifications
The Society may on occasion modify the contractual terms of loans provided
to members. When this is solely for commercial reasons and considered
part of the ordinary course of business, there is no impact on the
impairment approach. Generally, forbearance at the Society, whether retail
or SBL lending, does not result in the terms of the loan being modified so
significantly that it becomes substantially a different financial asset, and
therefore, the original loan remains and does not result in derecognition.
Write off of financial assets
Financial assets are written off either partially or in their entirety only when
the Group has stopped pursuing the recovery, for example by bankruptcy,
insolvency, renegotiation and similar events. If the amount to be written off
is greater than the accumulated loss allowance, the difference is first
treated as an addition to the loss allowance, which is then applied to the
gross carrying amount. Any subsequent recoveries are credited to the
Income Statement on settlement receipt.
Cash in hand and balances with the Bank of England, Loans and advances
to credit institutions and debt securities
The Group reviews the external credit ratings of its liquid assets at each
reporting date. Those assets, which are of investment grade or higher, are
considered to have low credit risk and therefore are assumed to have not
had a significant increase in credit risk since initial recognition. This includes
the Society’s debt security portfolio. The Society’s policy to allow only high
quality, senior secured exposures to RMBS and Covered Bonds ensures
continued Society receipt of contractual cash flows in stressed scenarios.
For all other wholesale liquidity balances, a simple model calculates the ECL
allowance, based on externally provided 12-month PD rates for individual
counterparties.
Derecognition of financial assets and liabilities
Financial assets are derecognised when the contractual rights to receive
cash flows have expired or where substantially all the risks and rewards of
ownership have been transferred. Financial liabilities are derecognised only
when the obligation is discharged, cancelled or has expired.
Financial liabilities
All non-derivative financial liabilities, that include shares and wholesale
funds, held by the Group are measured at amortised cost with interest
recognised using the effective interest rate method.
Discounts and other
costs incurred in the raising of wholesale funds are amortised over the
period to maturity using the effective interest rate method.
Fair value of financial assets and liabilities
IFRS 13 requires an entity to classify financial instruments held at fair value
and those not measured at fair value but for which the fair value is disclosed
according to a hierarchy that reflects the significance of observable market
inputs in calculating those fair values. The three levels of the fair value
hierarchy are defined as:
Level 1 – Valuation using quoted market prices
Financial instruments are classified as Level 1 if their value is observable in
an active market. Such instruments are valued by reference to unadjusted
quoted prices for identical assets or liabilities in active markets where the
quoted price is readily available, and the price reflects actual and regularly
occurring market transactions on an arm’s length basis. An active market is
one in which transactions occur with sufficient volume and frequency to
provide pricing information on an ongoing basis.
Level 2 – Valuation technique using observable inputs
Financial instruments classified as Level 2 have been valued using models
whose inputs are observable in an active market. Valuations based on
observable inputs include derivative financial instruments such as swaps
and forwards which are valued using market standard pricing techniques
and options that are commonly traded in markets where all the inputs to
the market standard pricing models are observable. They also include
investment securities valued using consensus pricing or other observable
market prices.
Level 3 – Valuation technique using significant unobservable inputs
Financial instruments are classified as Level 3 if their valuation incorporates
significant inputs that are not based on observable market data
(‘unobservable inputs’). A valuation input is considered observable if it can
be directly observed from transactions in an active market, or if there is
compelling external evidence demonstrating an executable exit price.
Unobservable input levels can generally be determined based on
observable inputs of a similar nature, historical observations or other
analytical techniques.
Subscribed capital
Subscribed capital comprises PIBS which have no voting rights and have
contractual terms to settle interest and is therefore classified as a financial
liability. It is presented separately on the face of the Statement of Financial
Position. Subscribed capital is initially recognised at ‘fair value’ being its
issue proceeds net of transaction costs incurred and subsequently held at
amortised cost
The interest on the subscribed capital is recognised on an effective interest
rate basis in the Income Statement as interest expense.
Intangible assets
Computer software
Purchased software and costs and internal time directly associated with the
internal development of computer software are capitalised as intangible
assets where the software is an identifiable asset controlled by the Group
which will generate future economic benefits and where costs can be
reliably measured. Costs incurred to establish technological feasibility or to
maintain existing levels of performance are recognised as an expense as
incurred. Intangible assets are stated at cost less cumulative amortisation
and impairment losses.
Amortisation begins when the asset becomes available for operational use
and is charged to the Income Statement on a straight-line basis over the
estimated useful life of the software, which is between 1 to 8 years. The
amortisation periods used are reviewed annually.
Assets are reviewed for impairment at each Statement of Financial Position
date or whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the
carrying amount may not be recoverable. An asset’s carrying amount is
written down immediately to its recoverable amount, if the asset’s carrying
amount is greater than its estimated recoverable amount. The recoverable
amount is the higher of the asset’s fair value less costs to sell, and its value
in use.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page | 57 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Notes to the Accounts
for the years ended 31
st
December 2025 and 31
st
December 2024
1 Accounting policies (continued)
Property, plant and equipment
Additions and improvements to office premises and equipment, including
costs directly attributable to the acquisition of the asset, are capitalised at
cost.
Freehold land and buildings are measured under the Revaluation Model,
while leasehold premises and other assets remain under the Cost Model.
The property, plant and equipment value in the Statement of Financial
Position represents original cost (or fair value for revalued assets) less
cumulative depreciation. Depreciation is charged on a straight-line basis
over estimated useful economic lives as follows:
Asset Class
Measurement
Depreciation Policy
Model
Freehold land and
Revaluation
Land: no depreciation
buildings
Buildings: 100 years
Leasehold improvements
Cost
Lease term
Refurbishment of
Cost
5–10 years or length of
premises
lease if shorter
Equipment, fixtures,
fittings, vehicles
Cost
4–10 years
For assets measured using the Cost model, an impairment review is
performed at each Statement of Financial Position date, or whenever events
or changes in circumstances suggest that the carrying amount may not be
recoverable. If the carrying amount of an asset exceeds its recoverable
amount, it is immediately written down to that recoverable amount. The
recoverable amount is defined as the higher of the asset’s fair value less
costs to sell, and its value in use.
For assets measured under the Revaluation model, fair value movements
arising from revaluations are recognised in Other Comprehensive Income
and accumulated in the Revaluation Reserve within equity. Where a
revaluation reverses a previous decrease recognised in profit or loss, the
reversal is recognised in profit or loss to the extent of the previous decrease.
The balance on the Revaluation Reserve is non‑distributable.
Leases
The Group assesses at contract inception whether a contract is, or contains,
a lease. That is, if the contract conveys the right to control the use of an
identified asset for a period of time in exchange for consideration.
Group as a lessee
The Group applies a single recognition and measurement approach for all
leases, except for short-term leases and leases of low value assets. The
Group recognises lease liabilities, as the current value of future lease
payments, and right-of-use assets representing the right to use the
underlying leased assets.
Right-of-use assets
The Group recognises right-of-use assets at the commencement date of the
lease (i.e. the date the underlying asset is available for use). Right-of-use
assets are measured at cost, less any accumulated depreciation and
impairment losses, and adjusted for any remeasurement of lease liabilities.
The cost of right-of-use assets includes the amount of lease liabilities
recognised, initial direct costs incurred, and lease payments made at or
before the commencement date less any lease incentives received. Right-
of-use assets are depreciated on a straight-line basis over the lease term,
adjusted to take account of any expected break or extension options.
The lease terms are as follows:
• leasehold premises over 10 to 15 years;
• equipment, fixtures and fittings over 3 to 5 years; or
• motor vehicles over 3 to 5 years.
Right-of-use assets are reviewed for impairment at each Statement of
Financial Position date or whenever events or changes in circumstances
indicate that the carrying amount may not be recoverable. An asset’s
carrying amount is written down immediately to its recoverable amount if
the asset’s carrying amount is greater than its estimated recoverable
amount. The recoverable amount is the higher of the asset’s fair value less
costs to sell, and its value in use.
Lease liabilities
At the commencement date of the lease, the Group recognises lease
liabilities measured at the present value of lease payments to be made over
the lease term, discounted using the incremental borrowing rate. The lease
payments include fixed payments less any lease incentive receivable,
variable lease payments that depend on an index or a rate, and amounts
expected to be paid under any residual value guarantees.
In calculating the present value of lease payments, the Group uses its
incremental borrowing rate at the lease commencement date as the
interest rate implicit in the lease is not readily determinable. The
incremental borrowing rate is determined based on the cost of funding to
the Group. After the commencement date, the amount of lease liabilities is
increased to reflect the accretion of interest and reduced for lease
payments made.
In addition, the carrying amount of lease liabilities is remeasured if there is
a modification, a change in the lease term or a change in the lease
payments.
The Group does not have an option to purchase the underlying asset in its
lease agreements.
Short-term leases and leases of low-value assets
The Group applies the short-term lease recognition exemption to its short-
term leases (i.e. those leases that have a lease term of 12-months or less
from the commencement date). It also applies the lease of low-value assets
recognition exemption to assets that are considered be of low value. Lease
payments on short-term leases and leases of low-value assets are
recognised as an expense on a straight-line basis over the term of the lease.
Taxation
Income tax on the profit or loss for the year comprises current and deferred
tax. Income tax is recognised in the Income Statement except to the extent
that it relates to items recognised directly in OCI, in which case it is
recognised in other comprehensive Income.
Current tax is the expected tax payable on the taxable income and gains
arising in the accounting period.
Deferred tax is recognised on all temporary differences arising between the
tax bases of assets and liabilities and their carrying amounts in the Financial
Statements. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are offset only if a legally
enforceable right exists to set off current tax assets against current tax
liabilities, the deferred income taxes relate to the same taxation authority
and the authority permits the Society to make a single net payment.
Deferred tax assets are only recognised where it is probable that future
taxable profit will be available against which the temporary differences can
be utilised.
Both current and deferred taxes are determined using the rates enacted or
substantively enacted at the Statement of Financial Position date.
Tax relating to fair value re-measurement of investments measured at
FVOCI, which are charged or credited directly to OCI, is also credited or
charged directly to other comprehensive income and is subsequently
recognised in the Income Statement when the deferred fair value gain or
loss is recognised in the Income Statement.
Tax relating to actuarial gains / (losses) on retirement benefit obligations is
recognised in other comprehensive income.
Employee benefits
Long-term incentive schemes
The costs of bonuses payable after the end of the year in which they are
earned are recognised on an accruals basis in the year in which the
employees render the related service.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page | 58 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Notes to the Accounts
for the years ended 31
st
December 2025 and 31
st
December 2024
1 Accounting policies (continued)
Pensions
The Group operated a contributory defined benefit pension scheme until
31
st
January 2009 when it was closed to future service accrual. The assets
are held in a separate trustee administered fund. Included within the
Statement of Financial Position is the Group’s net obligation calculated as
the present value of the defined benefit obligation less the fair value of plan
assets less any unrecognised past service costs. Any remeasurements that
arise are recognised immediately in OCI through the Statement of
Comprehensive Income. The finance cost is recognised within
administrative expenses. The finance cost is the increase in the defined
benefit obligation which arises because the benefits are one period closer
to settlement.
Contributions are transferred to the Trustee administered fund on a regular
basis to secure the benefits provided under the rules of the scheme. Pension
costs are assessed in accordance with the advice of a professionally
qualified actuary.
The Group also operates a contributory defined contribution pension
scheme, the assets of which are held separately from those of the Group.
For this scheme the cost is charged to the Income Statement on an accruals
basis.
Provisions and contingent liabilities
The Group recognises a provision when there is a present legal or
constructive obligation as a result of past events, and it is probable that an
outflow of resources will be required to settle the obligation, and the
amount has been reliably estimated. Please see Note 27 for further
information in relation to the provision associated with the Philips Trust
Corporation voluntary payment scheme.
The Society has an obligation to contribute to the Financial Services
Compensation Scheme (‘FSCS’) to enable the FSCS to meet compensation
claims from, in particular, retail depositors of failed banks. A provision is
recognised to the extent it can be reliably estimated and when the Society
has an obligation in accordance with IFRIC 21. The amount provided is
based on information received from the FSCS, forecast future interest rates
and the Society's historic share of industry protected deposits.
Contingent liabilities are potential obligations from past events which will
only be confirmed by future events. Contingent liabilities are not recognised
in the Statement of Financial Position.
Accounting estimates and judgements
Whilst preparing the Financial Statements, no judgements have been made
in the process of applying the Group’s significant accounting policies, other
than those involving estimations, which have had a significant effect on the
amounts recognised in the Financial Statements. The Group’s significant
estimates, including judgements involving estimations, are shown below.
Impairment losses on loans and advances to members
The Group reviews its mortgage portfolio at least monthly to assess
impairment. In determining whether an impairment loss should be
recorded, the Group is required to exercise a degree of judgement, in
particular, the estimation of the amount and timing of future cash flows and
collateral values and the assessment of significant increase in credit risk. The
Society’s ECL calculations under IFRS 9 are outputs of complex models with
several underlying assumptions regarding the choice of variable inputs and
their interdependencies, which individually are not possible to isolate. Note
15 outlines the accounting policies and key definitions for IFRS 9.
Key elements of the ECL models that are considered accounting
judgements, including estimation, include:
• the internal credit grading model, which assigns PDs to individual
accounts;
• the criteria for assessing if there has been a significant increase in
credit risk;
• determination of associations between macroeconomic scenarios,
economic inputs and the effect on PDs, EADs and LGDs;
• selection of forward-looking macroeconomic scenarios and their
probability weightings to derive economic inputs to the ECL models;
and
• post model adjustments to address model limitations, including:
i) potential for interest rate shock; and
ii) cost-of-living & inflationary impact.
Employee benefits
The Group operates a defined benefit pension scheme. Significant
judgements (on such areas as future interest and inflation rates and
mortality rates) have to be exercised in estimating the value of the assets
and liabilities of the scheme . The assumptions are outlined in Note 28 to
the accounts. Of these assumptions, the main determinant of the liability is
the discount rate. A variation of 0.25% in the discount rate will change
liabilities by approximately £1.0m (2024: £1.0m).
Page | 59 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Notes to the Accounts
for the years ended 31
st
December 2025 and 31
st
December 2024
2 Segmental reporting
The chief operating decision maker has been identified as the Group Board. The Board reviews the Group’s internal reporting in order to assess performance and
allocate resources. Operating segments are reported in a manner consistent with the internal reporting provided to the Board.
Following the disposal of several subsidiaries in prior years, the remaining trade of the Group relates purely to retail financial services which includes the provision
of mortgages, savings, third party insurance and investments. The results of the Society are assessed by Management as one retail business unit as opposed to
separate functional divisions.
As there is only one trade and retail business unit within the Group, the results of the financial services business are presented on the face of the Income Statement
and as such no separate disclosure is required within this note.
3 Interest receivable and similar income
Group
Group
Society
Society
2025
2024
2025
2024
£m
£m
£m
£m
On loans fully secured on residential property
170.6
142.4
170.6
142.4
On secured business loans
36.6
27.5
36.6
27.5
On amounts due from group undertakings
-
-
3.5
3.9
On liquid assets
17.2
23.3
17.2
23.3
On instruments held at amortised cost
224.4
193.2
227.9
197.1
On debt securities held at FVOCI
26.9
21.0
26.1
21.0
On derivatives held in hedge relationships
29.4
53.1
29.4
53.2
On instruments calculated on an EIR basis
280.7
267.3
283.4
271.3
On derivatives not in a hedge accounting relationship
8.9
10.7
0.4
1.3
289.6
278.0
283.8
272.6
Interest on debt securities includes £9.9 million (2024: £3.3 million) arising from fixed income investment securities.
Included within interest income is £0.6 million (2024: £0.5 million) in respect of interest income accrued on impaired loans three or more months in arrears.
4 Interest payable and similar charges
Group
Group
Society
Society
2025
2024
2025
2024
£m
£m
£m
£m
On shares held by individuals
164.3
154.6
164.3
154.6
On amounts due to group undertakings
-
-
20.1
7.4
On deposits and other borrowings
29.8
28.2
6.0
15.4
On subscribed capital
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
On leases
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
On derivatives held in hedge relationships
6.7
9.5
6.7
9.5
202.9
194.4
199.2
189.0
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page | 60 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Notes to the Accounts
for the years ended 31
st
December 2025 and 31
st
December 2024
5 Net (losses) / gains from derivative financial instruments
Group
Group
Society
Society
2025
2024
2025
2024
£m
£m
£m
£m
Derivatives in designated fair value hedge relationships
(49.0)
(2.1)
(49.1)
(2.1)
Adjustments to hedged items in fair value hedge relationships
46.3
3.7
46.3
3.7
Derivatives not in designated fair value hedge relationships
(0.3)
2.3
7.5
5.8
(3.0)
3.9
4.7
7.4
The Group’s net losses from derivative financial instruments of £3.0 million (2024: net gains of £3.9 million) represents the net fair value movement on
derivatives and adjustments to hedged items, including: £0.1m of losses (2024: gains of £2.1m) on swaps held against the mortgage pipeline; £0.9m of
amortisation gains due to macro FV hedge accounting (2024: gains of £0.8m); £3.6m of losses (2024: gains of £0.8m) due to movements in the ineffectiveness
of the macro FV hedge accounting portfolios; and £nil losses associated with micro FV hedge accounting (2024: £nil). The remaining gains / losses in both
Group and Society relate to the derivatives hedging the secured funding balance.
Further information regarding the Group and Society’s derivative financial instruments and fair value hedge accounting is presented in Notes 13 and 31 of
the Financial Statements.
6 Administrative expenses
Group
Group
Society
Society
2025
2024
2025
2024
£m
£m
£m
£m
Wages and salaries
29.7
24.6
29.7
24.6
Social security costs
3.5
2.8
3.5
2.8
Other pension costs
1.6
1.1
1.6
1.1
Total employee costs
34.8
28.5
34.8
28.5
Other administrative costs
28.3
30.9
27.8
30.7
63.1
59.4
62.6
59.2
The restructuring costs relating to continuing operations included in wages and salaries for the Group and Society in 2025 amounts to £2.6 million (2024: £1.2
million).
Group
Group
Society
Society
2025
2024
2025
2024
£000
£000
£000
£000
Other administrative costs include:
Remuneration of auditors and associates (excluding VAT)
Fees payable to the auditor for the audit of the Annual Accounts
429
416
429
416
Fees payable to the auditor for other services:
-
Audit of the accounts of subsidiary undertakings
44
11
-
-
-
Audit of associated pension schemes
18
18
18
18
-
Audit related assurance services
82
74
82
74
-
Non-audit services
-
-
-
-
Total audit fees for the financial year
573
519
529
508
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page | 61 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Notes to the Accounts
for the years ended 31
st
December 2025 and 31
st
December 2024
7 Employees
Group
Group
Society
Society
2025
2024
2025
2024
Number
Number
Number
Number
Continuing operations
The average number of persons employed during the year was:
Full-time
439
406
439
406
Part-time
107
105
107
105
546
511
546
511
Building society
Central Administration
367
331
367
331
Branches
179
180
179
180
546
511
546
511
The average number of employees on a full-time equivalent basis in the Society was 512 (2024: 478) and all of these are employed within the UK.
8 Tax charge
Group
Group
Society
Society
2025
2024
2025
2024
Notes
£m
£m
£m
£m
Current tax charge
6.2
4.2
6,2
4.2
Adjustments for prior years
-
-
-
-
Total current tax
6.2
4.2
6.2
4.2
Deferred tax
(0.1)
0.4
(0.1)
0.4
Adjustments for prior years
(0.1)
-
(0.1)
-
Total deferred tax
20
(0.2)
0.4
(0.2)
0.4
6.0
4.6
6.0
4.6
The total tax charge for the year differs from that calculated using the UK standard rate of corporation tax. The differences are explained below:
Group
Group
Society
Society
2025
2024
2025
2024
£m
£m
£m
£m
Profit before taxation
16.7
13.9
22.8
17.6
Expected tax charge at 25% (2024: 25%)
4.2
3.4
5.7
4.4
Expenses not deductible for corporation tax
0.4
0.2
0.4
0.2
Effective securitisation
1.5
1.0
-
-
Adjustment for prior years
(0.1)
-
(0.1)
-
6.0
4.6
6.0
4.6
The tax charge for Arrow Mortgage Finance No.1 Ltd and Lace Funding 2025‑1 PLC has been calculated in accordance with the permanent regime for taxation
of securitisation companies and its corporation tax is calculated by reference to its retained profits and not accounting profit and loss. This results in a
negligible tax charge within these entities and a higher level of taxation within the Society on a standalone basis in both 2024 and 2025.
Group
Group
Society
Society
2025
2024
2025
2024
£m
£m
£m
£m
Tax recognised directly in other comprehensive income
Tax expense on FVOCI assets
-
-
-
-
Tax expense on revaluation reserve
0.1
-
0.1
-
Tax expense on pension scheme
-
0.2
-
0.2
Tax expense for the year
0.1
0.2
0.1
0.2
Factors affecting standard rate of tax
Deferred tax assets and liabilities are measured at the enacted tax rates that are expected to apply when the related asset is realised or liability is settled.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page | 62 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Notes to the Accounts
for the years ended 31
st
December 2025 and 31
st
December 2024
9 Cash in hand and balances with the Bank of England
Group
Group
Society
Society
2025
2024
2025
2024
£m
£m
£m
£m
Cash in hand
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
Balances with the Bank of England
295.9
440.1
295.9
440.1
297.0
441.2
297.0
441.2
10 Loans and advances to credit institutions
Group
Group
Society
Society
2025
2024
2025
2024
£m
£m
£m
£m
Repayable on call and short notice
29.6
9.3
0.4
0.1
Other loans and advances to credit institutions
39.7
12.3
39.7
12.3
69.3
21.6
40.1
12.4
As at 31
st
December 2025 £39.7 million (2024: £12.3 million) of cash has been deposited by the Group and Society as collateral against derivative contracts.
11 Cash and cash equivalents
Group
Group
Society
Society
2025
2024
2025
2024
£m
£m
£m
£m
Cash in hand and balances with the Bank of England
297.0
441.2
297.0
441.2
Loans and advances to credit institutions
29.6
8.3
0.4
0.1
326.6
449.5
297.4
441.3
12 Debt securities
Group and Society
2025
2024
Notes
£m
£m
Debt securities
Gilts
96.3
15.1
Treasury bills
148.3
93.6
Fixed rate notes
97.4
32.8
Floating rate notes
34.1
26.6
Mortgage backed securities
129.1
128.6
Floating covered bonds
199.6
157.5
704.8
454.2
Movements on debt securities during the year may be analysed as follows:
As at 1 January
454.2
340.1
Additions
488.8
268.1
Disposals and maturities
(240.2)
(153.5)
Loss on disposal of treasury assets taken to Income Statement
-
-
Net gains from changes in fair value recognised in other comprehensive income
30
2.0
(0.5)
704.8
454.2
Of this total £342.0 million (2024: £141.5 million) is attributable to fixed income debt securities.
Debt securities included items with a carrying value of £nil (2024: £nil) which have been pledged as collateral under Bank of England facilities.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page | 63 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Notes to the Accounts
for the years ended 31
st
December 2025 and 31
st
December 2024
13 Derivative financial instruments
Group
2025
2025
2025
20142024
22024
22024
Contract /
Fair value
Contract /
Fair value
notional Fair value of notional Fair value of
amount
of assets
liabilities
amount
of assets
liabilities
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
Derivatives not in a hedge accounting relationship
Interest rate swaps
1,006.1
3.5
(4.2)
609.6
11.4
(11.9)
Derivatives designated as fair value hedges
Interest rate swaps – macro hedge accounting
4,809.8
25.9
(25.1)
4,662.2
69.0
(11.0)
Interest rate swaps – micro hedge accounting
185.3
-
(1.9)
48.3
0.5
-
6,001.2
29.4
(31.2)
5,320.1
80.9
(22.9)
Society
2025
2025
2025
20142024
22024
22024
Contract /
Fair value
Fair value
Contract /
Fair value
Fair value
notional of assets of notional of assets of
amount
liabilities
amount
liabilities
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
Derivatives not in a hedge accounting relationship
Interest rate swaps
535.6
-
(4.2)
404.8
0.3
(11.9)
Derivatives designated as fair value hedges
Interest rate swaps – macro hedge accounting
4,809.8
25.6
(25.1)
4,662.2
68.7
(11.0)
Interest rate swaps – micro hedge accounting
185.3
-
(1.9)
48.3
0.5
-
5,530.7
25.6
(31.2)
5,115.3
69.5
(22.9)
Derivative fair values have fallen in the year due to changes in the interest rate environment. Further information regarding the Group’s hedge accounting and
fair value hedges is presented in Note 31.
The Group’s interest rate swaps which are not held by the Society are held by Arrow Mortgage Finance No. 1 Ltd and hedge the interest rate risk associated with
the Group’s securitisation funding.
14 Loans and advances to members
Group and Society
2025
2024
Notes
£m
£m
Loans fully secured on residential property
3,569.9
3,650.3
Secured business loans
716.8
589.5
Loans gross balance
4,286.7 4,239.8
Effective interest rate adjustment
6.8
1.7
Provision for impairment losses on loans and advances
15
(4.5)
(5.2)
Fair value adjustment for hedged risk
16.0
(34.5)
4,305.0 4,201.8
Encumbrance
The Society pledges a proportion of its loans and advances to members to enable it to access funding either through a secured funding arrangement or as whole
mortgage loan pools with the Bank of England.
Loans and advances to members used to support these funding activities are as follows:
Group and Society
Mortgages
Held by third
Held by the
Held by the
pledged
parties
Group drawn
Group undrawn
2025
£m
£m
£m
£m
Bank of England
535.4
-
-
535.4
Other secured funding
462.4
462.4
-
-
997.8
462.4
-
535.4
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page | 64 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Notes to the Accounts
for the years ended 31
st
December 2025 and 31
st
December 2024
14 Loans and advances to members (continued)
Group and Society
Mortgages
Held by third
Held by the
Held by the
pledged
parties
Group drawn
Group undrawn
2024
£m
£m
£m
£m
Bank of England
710.1
-
384.9
325.2
Other secured funding
209.5
209.5
-
-
919.6
209.5
384.9
325.2
Other secured funding
As at 31
st
December 2025 loans and advances to members also includes balances for both the Group and Society which have been used in secured funding
arrangements, resulting in the beneficial interest of these loans being transferred to Arrow Mortgage Finance No.1 Limited and Lace Funding 2025-1 PLC, SPVs
consolidated into the Group’s Accounts. All of the loans pledged, with a book value of £462.4 million (2024: £209.5 million) and a fair value of £528.9 million (2024:
£205.2 million) are retained within the Society’s Statement of Financial Position as the Society retains substantially all the risk and rewards relating to the loans.
These loans secure £408.9 million (2024: £184.7 million) of funding for the Group (Note 25) and £457.7 million (2024: £208.2 million) of funding for the Society
(Note 24).
15 Provision for impairment losses on loans and advances to members
Impairment provisions have been deducted from the appropriate asset values on the Statement of Financial Position. The gross carrying amounts and impairment
provisions are presented in detail below:
Group and Society
Loans fully
Loans fully
secured on Secured secured on Secured
residential business residential business
property
loans
Total
property
loans
Total
2025
2025
2025
2024
2024
2024
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
Gross carrying amount
Stage 1
3,301.0
676.6
3,977.6
3,279.7
550.1
3,829.8
Stage 2
240.6
34.8
275.4
351.9
31.9
383.8
Stage 3
28.3
5.4
33.7
18.7
7.5
26.2
3,569.9
716.8
4,286.7
3,650.3
589.5
4,239.8
Group and Society
Loans fully
Loans fully
secured on Secured secured on Secured
residential business residential business
property
loans
Total
property
loans
Total
2025
2025
2025
2024
2024
2024
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
Expected credit loss allowance
Stage 1
1.6
1.2
2.8
2.4
1.3
3.7
Stage 2
0.8
0.4
1.2
0.6
0.3
0.9
Stage 3
0.2
0.3
0.5
0.1
0.5
0.6
2.6
1.9
4.5
3.1
2.1
5.2
The Society’s ECL coverage ratio, as a percentage of gross loans is 0.11% at 31
st
December 2025 (2024: 0.12%) for the total book.
At 31
st
December 2025, £13.2m of balances were over 3-months in arrears (2024: £9.0 million), representing 0.3% of the total mortgage book (2024: 0.2%). As at
31
st
December 2025, 0.4% (2024: 0.4%) of mortgage members have some sort of contractual forbearance arrangement in place. Further details of the Society’s
arrears and forbearance cases are disclosed in Note 31.
The ECL allowance recognised against the Society’s future loan commitment balance at 31
st
December 2025 and 2024 is immaterial to the Financial Statements
and therefore has not been separately disclosed. Future loan commitments are classified as Stage 1 for ECL calculation purposes under IFRS 9.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page | 65 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Notes to the Accounts
for the years ended 31
st
December 2025 and 31
st
December 2024
15 Provision for impairment losses on loans and advances to members (continued)
Post model adjustment
Due to the level of uncertainty in the economy, at 31
st
December 2025, the Society has applied an overlay to its core ECL models to reflect Management’s view
that there will be an impact on affordability as a result of the cumulative impact of recent inflationary pressures and the interest rate environment. An overlay
ECL allowance of £2.8 million has been recognised at 31
st
December 2025 (2024: £3.8 million). Due to easing of inflation at the end of 2025, the PD Uplift
associated with cost-of-living and inflation has reduced to an absolute 4% PD uplift (2024: 6%) to retail and 4% PD uplift (2024: 4%) for commercial Stage 1 and
2 accounts.
The (release) / charge to the Income Statement comprises:
Group and Society
2025
2025
2025
2024
2024
2024
Loans fully
Loans fully
secured on Secured secured on Secured
residential business residential business
property loans Total property loans Total
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
(Release) / charge of provision for impairment
(0.5)
(0.2)
(0.7)
(0.4)
0.4
-
(0.5)
(0.2)
(0.7)
(0.4)
0.4
-
The charge for amounts written off on loans and advances to members in 2025 amounts to £0.3m (2024: £nil). There have been no recoveries of debts previously
written-off.
The tables below reconcile the movement in both gross balances and expected credit losses in the period.
Gross balances
Non-credit impaired
Credit impaired
Subject to 12
Subject to
Subject to
month ECL
lifetime ECL
lifetime ECL
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Total
£m
£m
£m
£m
At 1
st
January 2025
3,829.8
383.8
26.2
4,239.8
Stage transfers:
Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2
(170.8)
170.8
-
-
Transfers to Stage 3
(6.7)
(8.3)
15.0
-
Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1
163.9
(163.9)
-
-
Transfers from Stage 3
3.6
1.9
(5.5)
-
Net movement arising from transfer of stage
(10.0)
0.5
9.5
-
New assets originated
865.4
6.0
2.3
873.7
Net further lending / repayments and redemptions
(707.6)
(114.9)
(4.3)
(826.8)
At 31
st
December 2025
3,977.6
275.4
33.7
4,286.7
Expected credit loss allowance
Non-credit impaired
Credit impaired
Subject to 12
Subject to
Subject to
month ECL
lifetime ECL
lifetime ECL
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Total
£m
£m
£m
£m
At 1
st
January 2025
3.7
0.9
0.6
5.2
Stage transfers:
Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2
(0.2)
0.2
-
-
Transfers to Stage 3
-
(0.1)
0.1
-
Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1
0.3
(0.3)
-
-
Transfers from Stage 3
-
0.1
(0.1)
-
Net movement arising from transfer of stage
0.1
(0.1)
-
-
New assets originated
1
0.8
0.1
0.0
0.9
Further lending / repayments and redemptions
(1.5)
(0.2)
(0.2)
(1.9)
Impact of change in macroeconomic forecast
(0.3)
0.5
0.1
0.3
At 31
st
December 2025
2.8
1.2
0.5
4.5
1
New assets originated enter at Stage 1. The balances presented are the final position as at 31
st
December 2025.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page | 66 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Notes to the Accounts
for the years ended 31
st
December 2025 and 31
st
December 2024
15 Provision for impairment losses on loans and advances to members (continued)
Gross balances
Non-credit impaired
Credit impaired
Subject to 12 month
Subject to
Subject to lifetime
ECL
lifetime ECL
ECL
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Total
£m
£m
£m
£m
At 1
st
January 2024
3,185.2
384.9
22.3
3,592.4
Stage transfers:
Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2
(257.6)
257.6
-
-
Transfers to Stage 3
(7.1)
(4.4)
11.5
-
Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1
147.1
(147.1)
-
-
Transfers from Stage 3
3.0
2.0
(5.0)
-
Net movement arising from transfer of stage
(114.6)
108.1
6.5
-
New assets originated
1
1,185.6
14.7
1.6
1,201.9
Net further lending / repayments and redemptions
(426.4)
(123.9)
(4.2)
(554.5)
At 31
st
December 2024
3,829.8
383.8
26.2
4,239.8
Expected credit loss allowance
Non-credit impaired
Credit impaired
Subject to 12 month
Subject to
Subject to lifetime
ECL
lifetime ECL
ECL
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Total
£m
£m
£m
£m
At 1
st
January 2024
4.1
0.7
0.4
5.2
Stage transfers:
Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2
(0.2)
0.2
-
-
Transfers to Stage 3
-
-
-
-
Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1
0.2
(0.2)
-
-
Transfers from Stage 3
-
-
-
-
Net movement arising from transfer of stage
-
-
-
-
New assets originated
1
1.3
0.1
-
1.4
Further lending / repayments and redemptions
(1.5)
(0.2)
-
(1.7)
Impact of change in macroeconomic forecast
(0.2)
0.3
0.2
0.3
At 31
st
December 2024
3.7
0.9
0.6
5.2
1
New assets originated enter at Stage 1. The balances presented are the final position as at 31
st
December 2024.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page | 67 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Notes to the Accounts
for the years ended 31
st
December 2025 and 31
st
December 2024
15 Provision for impairment losses on loans and advances to members (continued)
Forward-looking information incorporated in the ECL models
The assessment of SICR and the calculation of ECL both incorporate forward-looking information, which takes into account key economic impacts. Key economic
variables have been determined by management, but expert judgement is also applied. Forecasts of these economic variables are provided by a reputable third
party, providing a best estimate view of the economy over the next five years. After five years, a mean reversion approach is used, i.e. long-run averages.
In addition to the base economic scenario forecast, other possible scenarios along with scenario weightings are obtained, of which management have applied
four scenarios in the model calculations. In the prior year, the Society applied a four-scenario approach, with weightings of 40% (base), 30% (upside), 23%
(downside) and 7% severe applied. These scenarios continue to be consistently provided by a reputable third party.
As at 31
st
December 2025
Weighting
Base
In the Base scenario, the overall economic impact is now expected to be less pronounced than previously anticipated. Nonetheless, U.S. tariffs
and softer global growth are still likely to constrain UK GDP expansion over the forecast period. The unemployment rate is projected to
stabilise, but the increase already observed is expected to maintain downward pressure on wage growth. With inflation concerns persisting,
the Bank of England is likely to slow the pace of interest rate cuts in 2026. Even so, we continue to expect policy rates to ultimately decline to
slightly below 3%.
40%
Upside
In the Upside scenario, we assume that the intensive phase of the war in Ukraine comes to an end. A renewed expansion in both demand and
supply supports stronger economic growth, easing recession concerns and lifting consumer and business confidence. The unemployment rate
30%
is expected to decline as hiring activity improves. However, rapid growth in demand also results in stronger inflationary pressures than in the
Baseline scenario. House prices accelerate at a faster pace, and the associated positive wealth effects provide additional support to household
consumption.
Downside
In the Downside scenario, global growth concerns intensify, driven primarily by the ongoing trade war and heightened geopolitical tensions
related to the conflict in Ukraine. As consumer confidence weakens, households cut back on spending, triggering a moderate recession as
firms respond with workforce reductions. Inflation is expected to fall more quickly than in the Baseline scenario. Rising worries over household
23%
debt prompt banks to tighten lending standards, restricting credit availability. This reduction in credit flows leads to weaker housing demand
and a subsequent decline in house prices.
Severe Downside
In the Severe Downside scenario, the global economy enters a deep recession driven by an escalating trade war, further deterioration of the
conflict in Ukraine, and rising geopolitical tensions between the U.S. and China. In response to the sharp contraction, the Bank of England cuts
7%
interest rates close to zero. Fixed investment stalls as firms face significantly higher costs and a pronounced drop in demand. A collapse in
global commodity prices results in a rapid and substantial fall in inflation. In the housing market, tighter lending standards and higher
loan
‑
to
‑
value ratios trigger a downward spiral in house prices.
As at 31
st
December 2024
Weighting
Base
The Base economic scenario assumes that the growth will be below potential for some time. Inflation declines but does not fall below the
target until the end of 2024. Bank of England rates will not rise and will start to fall in mid-2024. Neither the invasion of Ukraine nor Israel's
war against Hamas escalate beyond the regions.
40%
Upside
The Upside scenario assumes that the Russia’s invasion of Ukraine is resolved much faster than the baseline case. Growth is stronger than the
baseline with a reduction in unemployment rate. Inflation remains weaker than the baseline as the increase in demand is met by an increase
30%
in supply. The terminal rate of the Bank of England interest rate is higher than in the baseline, taking longer to converge to the long-run
interest rate.
Downside
In the Downside scenario, there are worries that the conflicts in the Middle East and Ukraine will escalate further. The Bank of England cuts
23%
rates sooner than the baseline with interest rates above the neutral level but above zero. There is a moderate recession, and inflation drops
below zero before increasing but remains below target for some time. House prices reduce by 23% peak to trough.
Severe Downside
In the Severe Downside scenario, there are worries that the conflicts in the Middle East and Ukraine will escalate further. The Bank of England
7%
cuts rates sooner than the baseline with interest rates becoming close to zero. The economy is in a severe recession with a strong and
immediate decline in inflation with inflation remaining below target for a prolonged period. House prices reduce by 31% peak to trough.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page | 68 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Notes to the Accounts
for the years ended 31
st
December 2025 and 31
st
December 2024
15 Provision for impairment losses on loans and advances to members (continued)
The summary below outlines the most significant forward-looking assumptions under IFRS 9, over the five year planning period across the optimistic, base and
pessimistic scenarios:
As at 31
st
December 2025
2026
2027
2028
2029
2030
%
%
%
%
%
Unemployment rate
Upside
4.5
4.1
4.1
4.3
4.5
Base
5.1
5.0
4.9
4.9
4.9
Downside
7.0
7.7
7.6
7.1
6.4
Severe Downside
8.2
8.8
8.5
8.2
7.5
House price index
Upside
16.5
5.4
(1.0)
(2.1)
0.1
Base
2.1
2.3
1.6
1.9
2.5
Downside
(9.1)
(7.0)
(0.8)
4.7
5.8
Severe Downside
(15.3)
(11.0)
1.2
3.4
5.0
Bank of England interest rate
Upside
3.5
3.2
2.9
2.5
2.5
Base
3.3
2.8
2.8
2.5
2.5
Downside
1.9
1.0
1.3
1.6
2.0
Severe Downside
1.4
0.7
0.7
0.8
1.0
As at 31
st
December 2024
2025
2026
2027
2028
2029
%
%
%
%
%
Unemployment rate
Upside
3.6
3.7
3.8
4.1
4.4
Base
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
Downside
6.2
7.2
7.3
6.9
6.3
Severe Downside
7.4
8.3
8.2
8.0
7.3
House price index
Upside
17.0
7.0
0.1
(2.6)
(0.3)
Base
2.2
3.9
2.6
1.5
2.1
Downside
(8.7)
(5.6)
1.9
4.2
5.4
Severe Downside
(14.9)
(9.6)
2.3
2.9
4.6
Bank of England interest rate
Upside
4.0
2.7
2.6
2.5
2.5
Base
4.1
2.8
2.5
2.5
2.5
Downside
2.5
0.9
1.4
1.7
2.0
Severe Downside
1.9
0.5
0.8
0.9
1.0
A significant degree of estimation relates to the relative weightings of the economic scenarios. In order to demonstrate this sensitivity, the impact of applying
100% of a particular scenario on the 31
st
December 2025 reported ECL position output is shown below:
ECL provision
(Decrease) /
(Decrease) /
31
st
December 2025
increase
increase
£m
£m
%
IFRS 9 weighted average
4.5
-
-
Base
3.6
(0.9)
(21.1)
Downside
7.4
2.9
61.0
Severe Downside
10.7
6.2
134.2
Upside
2.2
(2.3)
(51.6)
ECL provision
(Decrease) /
(Decrease) /
31
st
December 2024
increase
increase
£m
£m
%
IFRS 9 weighted average
5.2
-
-
Base
4.1
(1.1)
(21.0)
Downside
8.5
3.2
61.4
Severe Downside
12.4
7.2
136.4
Upside
2.6
(2.6)
(50.6)
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page | 69 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Notes to the Accounts
for the years ended 31
st
December 2025 and 31
st
December 2024
16 Amounts due from subsidiary undertakings
Society
2025
2024
Amount due
Amount due
£m
£m
As at 1
st
January
33.4
33.4
Further advances
45.4
-
Interest accrued
1.5
-
Less: payments
(2.9)
-
77.4
33.4
The Society has the following active undertakings, which operate and have registered offices in the UK and are included in the Group’s accounts:
Name of subsidiary undertaking
Principal business activity
Registration number
Ownership interest
Arrow Mortgage Finance No. 1 Ltd
Funding vehicle
09891174
See below
Lace Funding Holdings Limited
Intermediate holding company
15912339
See below
Lace Funding 2025-1 PLC
Funding vehicle
15912219
See below
The registered office of Arrow Mortgage Finance No. 1 Limited is 1 Bartholomew Lane, London, EC2N 2AX.
The registered office of Lace Funding Holdings Limited and Lace Funding 2025-1 PLC is Floor 5, Churchill Place, London, E14 5HU.
All subsidiaries are incorporated in England and Wales.
Arrow Mortgage Finance No. 1 Limited and Lace Funding 2025-1 PLC have been formed with nominal share capital, are funded through loans from the Society
and activities are carried out under the direction of the Society, under the legal terms of operation. The Society is exposed to variable returns from these entities
and therefore pass the test of control under IFRS 10. Consequently, they are fully consolidated into the Group’s Accounts.
In February 2025, Lace Funding 2025-1 PLC raised £350m of funding in the Group’s debut public RMBS issuance. The amounts due from Arrow Mortgage Finance
No. 1 Ltd and Lace Funding 2025-1 PLC have a contractual maturity of 12 months and 53 months respectively and are expected to be repaid within this period
in line with the secured funding term. The amounts due from both Arrow and Lace are classed as Stage 1 for ECL calculation purposes under IFRS 9 and the ECL
arising is immaterial to the Financial Statements.
17 Property, plant and equipment
2025
2025
2025
2025
2024
2024
2024
2024
Group and Society
Land and
Leasehold
Equipment,
Land and
Leasehold
Equipment,
Total
buildings improvements fixtures & fittings buildings improvements fixtures &
Total
fittings
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
Cost
As at 1
st
January
7.4
0.4
7.9
15.7
2.1
10.4
20.1
Revaluation
0.6
-
-
0.6
-
-
-
-
Additions
-
0.2
1.6
1.8
-
-
0.7
0.7
Disposals
(0.2)
(0.2)
(1.3)
(1.7)
(0.2)
(1.7)
(3.2)
(5.1)
As at 31
st
December
7.8
0.4
8.2
16.4
7.4
0.4
7.9
15.7
Depreciation
As at 1
st
January
2.2
0.3
5.2
7.7
2.2
1.9
7.5
11.6
Revaluation
(2.2)
-
-
(2.2)
-
-
-
-
Charge for the year
-
-
0.9
0.9
-
0.1
1.0
1.1
On disposals
-
(0.1)
(1.3)
(1.4)
-
(1.7)
(3.3)
(5.0)
As at 31
st
December
-
0.2
4.8
5.0
2.2
0.3
5.2
7.7
Net Book Value
7.8
0.2
3.4
11.4
at 31
st
December
5.2
0.1
2.7
8.0
7.6
During the year, NBS changed its accounting policy for freehold land and buildings from the Cost model to the Revaluation model.
The carrying amount had the Cost model been applied to land and buildings amounts to £5.1m.
The Society has also undertaken an exercise during the year to identify obsolete assets and recognised these as a disposal from the fixed asset register.
The carrying value of the disposed assets amounted to £0.3m (2024: £0.1m).
For land and buildings held under the Revaluation model, valuations are carried out by independent, professionally qualified valuers using methodologies based
on market evidence of recent transactions for similar properties. Valuations are performed every three years on a prudent vacant possession basis, with the
latest valuation completed on 31
st
July 2025.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page | 70 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Notes to the Accounts
for the years ended 31
st
December 2025 and 31
st
December 2024
18 Leases
The Statement of Financial Position shows the following amounts relating to leases:
Group and Society
2025
2025
2025
2025
2024
2024
2024
2024
Right of use assets
Motor
Motor
Property
Equipment
vehicles
Total
Property
Equipment
vehicles
Total
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
Cost
As at 1
st
January
4.3
0.2
0.3
4.8
3.7
0.2
0.3
4.2
Additions
0.2
-
-
0.2
1.0
-
-
1.0
Disposals
-
(0.2)
(0.2)
(0.4)
(0.4)
-
-
(0.4)
As at 31
st
December
4.5
-
0.1
4.6
4.3
0.2
0.3
4.8
Depreciation
As at 1
st
January
2.3
0.2
0.3
2.8
2.5
0.2
0.3
3.0
Charge for the year and
Impairment
0.3
-
-
0.3
0.3
-
-
0.3
Charge on disposals
-
(0.2)
(0.2)
(0.4)
(0.5)
-
-
(0.5)
As at 31
st
December
2.6
-
0.1
2.7
2.3
0.2
0.3
2.8
Net Book Value
1.9
-
-
1.9
2.0
-
-
2.0
As at 31
st
December
Group and Society
2025
2024
£m
£m
Lease liabilities
Current
0.4
0.3
Non-current
1.8
2.1
2.2
2.4
The Income Statement shows the following amounts relating to leases:
Group and Society
2025
2024
Notes
£m
£m
Depreciation charge for assets
0.3
0.3
Interest expense (included in interest payable and similar charges)
4
0.1
0.1
Expense relating to short-term leases (included in administrative expenses)
6
0.2
0.2
The total cash outflow for leases in 2025 was £0.5m (2024: £0.4m) for the Group, of which £0.4m (2024: £0.4m) related to the Society.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page | 71 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Notes to the Accounts
for the years ended 31
st
December 2025 and 31
st
December 2024
19 Intangible assets
2025
2024
Software
Software
Group and Society
Total
Total
£m
£m
Cost
As at 1
st
January
30.8
29.2
Additions
5.8
6.5
Disposals
(0.6)
(4.9)
As at 31
st
December
36.0
30.8
Amortisation
As at 1
st
January
22.0
23.2
Disposals
(0.6)
(4.9)
Charge for the year
3.4
3.7
As at 31
st
December
24.8
22.0
Net Book Value
As at 31
st
December
11.2
8.8
The Society has undertaken an exercise during the year to identify obsolete assets and recognised these as a disposal from the fixed asset register. The carrying
value of the disposed assets amounted to £nil.
£2.8m (2024: £4.5m) of research expenditure relating to intangible projects was expensed during the year, as the activities did not meet the development‑phase
recognition criteria set out in IAS 38 and therefore did not qualify for capitalisation; accordingly, the costs were recognised in profit or loss as incurred.
20 Deferred tax
Group
Group
Society
Society
2025
2024
2025
2024
£m
£m
£m
£m
At 1
st
January
0.4
1.1
0.4
1.1
Recognised in the Income Statement
0.2
(0.4)
0.2
(0.4)
Recognised directly in Other Comprehensive Income
(0.1)
(0.3)
(0.1)
(0.3)
At 31
st
December
0.5
0.4
0.5
0.4
The deferred tax (credit) / charge in the Income Statement comprises the following temporary differences:
Group
Group
Society
Society
2025
2024
2025
2024
£m
£m
£m
£m
Property plant and equipment
-
0.2
-
0.2
IFRS transitional adjustments
-
(0.1)
-
(0.1)
Other timing differences
(0.2)
(0.2)
(0.2)
(0.2)
Tax losses
-
0.5
-
0.5
(0.2)
0.4
(0.2)
0.4
Group
Group
Society
Society
2025
2024
2025
2024
£m
£m
£m
£m
Origination and reversal of temporary differences
(0.1)
0.4
(0.1)
0.4
Adjustment in respect to prior periods
(0.1)
-
(0.1)
-
(0.2)
0.4
(0.2)
0.4
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page | 72 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Notes to the Accounts
for the years ended 31
st
December 2025 and 31
st
December 2024
20 Deferred tax (continued)
Deferred income tax assets and liabilities as at 31
st
December are attributable to the following items:
Group
Group
Society
Society
2025
2024
2025
2024
£m
£m
£m
£m
Deferred tax assets
Property, plant and equipment
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
Other timing differences
0.5
0.4
0.5
0.4
0.6
0.5
0.6
0.5
Deferred tax liabilities
Property, plant and equipment
(0.1)
-
(0.1)
-
IFRS transitional adjustments
-
(0.1)
-
(0.1)
(0.1)
(0.1)
(0.1)
(0.1)
Net deferred tax asset
0.5
0.4
0.5
0.4
Deferred tax assets and liabilities have been offset as there is a legally enforceable right to set off current tax assets against current tax liabilities, the deferred
income taxes relate to the same taxation authority and the authority permits the Society to make a single net payment.
21 Shares
Group
2025
2024
£m
£m
Held by individuals
4,626.0
4,350.2
Fair value adjustment for hedged risk
5.2
0.3
4,631.2
4,350.5
22 Amounts owed to credit institutions
Group and Society
2025
2024
£m
£m
Amounts owed to credit institutions
0.1
327.1
0.1
327.1
The reduction in amounts owed to credit institutions relates to the repayment of the BoE’s TFSME scheme and repurchase agreements.
23 Amounts owed to other members
Group and Society
2025
2024
£m
£m
Demand accounts
Retail members
0.5
0.5
Other
0.2
0.2
0.7
0.7
Term deposits
Local authorities and universities
55.8
44.7
55.8
44.7
56.5
45.4
24 Amounts owed to subsidiary undertakings
Society
2025
2024
£m
£m
At 1
st
January
208.2
266.9
Advance
395.4
-
Repayment
(145.9)
(58.7)
At 31
st
December
457.7
208.2
The amounts owed to subsidiary undertakings represent deemed loans with Arrow Mortgage Finance No.1 Ltd and Lace Funding 2025-1 PLC as part of secured
funding balances. The repayment of the loans will follow the collection of the principal and interest of the underlying mortgage assets. The Arrow facility is
due to mature in December 2026 and Lace is due to mature in November 2074, noting that repayment of the Lace Notes is likely to be earlier than the
contractual maturity date.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page | 73 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Notes to the Accounts
for the years ended 31
st
December 2025 and 31
st
December 2024
25 Debt securities in issue
Group
Group
Society
Society
2025
2024
2025
2024
£m
£m
£m
£m
Senior secured debt
408.9
184.7
-
-
408.9
184.7
-
-
The underlying securities for the senior secured debt are certain loans and advances to members (see Note 14 for further detail). The Arrow facility is due to
mature in December 2026 and Lace is due to mature in November 2074, noting that repayment of the Lace Notes is likely to be earlier than the contractual
maturity date.
26 Other liabilities and accruals
Group
Group
Society
Society
2025
2024
2025
2024
£m
£m
£m
£m
Trade creditors
0.8
0.7
0.8
0.7
Accruals and deferred income
7.1
8.6
6.9
7.1
Employment taxes
1.0
0.8
1.0
0.8
Other creditors
2.1
3.1
2.1
3.1
11.0
13.2
10.8
11.7
27 Provisions for liabilities
Philips Trust Corporation
Group
Group
Society
Society
2025
2024
2025
2024
£m
£m
£m
£m
At 1
st
January
2.0
-
2.0
-
Anticipated costs associated with voluntary payments
(0.4)
11.2
(0.4)
11.2
Utilised in period
(1.5)
(9.2)
(1.5)
(9.2)
At 31
st
December
0.1
2.0
0.1
2.0
The announcement made by the Society in May 2024 created a constructive obligation to make voluntary payments relating to Philips Trust Corporation. A
provision was established to reflect the best estimate of the liability based on information supplied by the administrator of Philips Trust Corporation. The
administrator wrote to those impacted to outline the level of support available and as the Society anticipated all payments will be made within 12-months, no
discounting was applied. The Society has recovered £0.1m of funds in 2025 (2024: £1.0m) through the administration process to date. As both the amount
and timing of any further recoveries is uncertain, no allowance has been made for any additional recoveries.
Restructuring
Group
Group
Society
Society
2025
2024
2025
2024
£m
£m
£m
£m
At 1
st
January
-
-
-
-
Anticipated costs
2.5
1.2
2.6
1.2
Utilised in period
(1.5)
(1.2)
(1.6)
(1.2)
At 31
st
December
1.0
-
1.0
-
Anticipated restructuring expenditure of £2.5 million was recognised during the year in relation to planned organisational changes. These costs primarily relate
to staff‑related measures and other directly attributable expenditure necessary to implement the restructuring. During the year, £1.5 million of the provision
was utilised as actions under the restructuring plan were carried out. This resulted in a closing provision of £1.0 million at 31
st
December 2025 for both the
Group and the Society. No restructuring provision was held in the prior year.
Sensitivity
At 31
st
December 2025, there was relative certainty over the payments to be made in 2026 associated with Philips Trust Corporation and restructuring. As
such, the provision is not considered to be particularly sensitive.
FSCS levy
Following the settlement of the loans outstanding from the 2008 - 09 banking failures, there are no further liabilities outstanding. Ongoing costs of the FSCS
scheme are recognised in administrative expenses.
Contingent liabilities
As a deposit taker, the Society continues to have obligations to the FSCS, as well as other contractual obligations to third party suppliers, which may create a
financial obligation in future accounting periods. Please see Note 28 to understand the Society’s latest position in relation to the adverse High Court ruling
made against Virgin Media.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page | 74 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Notes to the Accounts
for the years ended 31
st
December 2025 and 31
st
December 2024
28 Retirement benefit obligations
a) Defined benefit obligations
The Group operates a contributory defined benefit scheme, the assets of which are held in a separate trustee administered fund. The scheme closed to new
members in 1997 and was closed for future service accrual from 31
st
January 2009.
The pension cost is assessed following the advice of a qualified independent actuary using the projected unit method. The latest funding review of the scheme
was as at 31
st
March 2023. This review showed that the market value of the scheme assets as at 31
st
March 2023 was £44.1 million and that the actuarial value
of those assets represented 106% of the benefits that had accrued to members after allowing for expected future increase in salaries.
The High Court issued a ruling in respect of Virgin Media vs. NTL Pension Trustees II Limited in relation to the validity of rule amendments made to defined
benefit pension schemes contracted-out on a Reference Scheme Test basis between 6
th
April 1997 and 5
th
April 2016. Pension scheme amendments during
this period required confirmation from the Scheme’s Actuary that the Reference Scheme Test would continue to be met and in the absence of such a
confirmation, the amendments would be considered void. In June 2025, the Department for Work and Pensions announced that legislation will be introduced
to enable scheme actuaries to provide retrospective Section 37 confirmations in relation to historic benefit changes. This is intended to address the uncertainty
created by the High Court ruling and mitigate the potential impact on affected schemes. No allowance has been made to account for the impact of this ruling
or the proposed legislative changes.
An updated actuarial valuation at 31
st
December 2025 was carried out on a market value basis by a qualified independent actuary, as follows:
Group and Society
2025
2024
The principal actuarial assumptions used were as follows:
Discount rate
5.40%
5.35%
Rate of increase in salaries
2.95%
3.35%
Rate of increase in pensions
3.65%
3.75%
Inflation
2.95%
3.35%
Post-retirement mortality
S3PMA_L (Male) / S3PFA
S3PMA_L (Male) / S3PFA
(Female) base table with (Female) base table with
CMI_2024 improvement CMI_2023 improvement
model
model
The assumptions applied follow the requirements of IAS 19, which are different to the technical valuation approach. This requires the discount rate to be
benchmarked against AA corporate rated bonds, which as at 31
st
December 2025 were higher (2024: higher) than the anticipated rate of future inflation.
The table below shows the assumptions used for expected life at 31
st
December based on an expected normal retirement age of 62.
Group and Society
2025
2025
2024
2024
Male
Female
Male
Female
Years
Years
Years
Years
Expected life at retirement for a new pensioner
26.6
27.9
26.3
27.7
Expected life at retirement in 20 years’ time
25.6
26.7
25.3
26.6
The Society is exposed to the risk that it will need to make additional future contributions to the Scheme, this risk may arise from a number of factors including:
• falls in the discount rate increasing the present value of scheme liabilities;
• higher inflation increasing the present value of scheme liabilities;
• increase in life expectancy increasing the present value of scheme liabilities; and
• reduction in equity / bond prices reducing the fair value of scheme assets.
Approximate sensitivities of the principal assumptions are set out in the table below which shows the increase or reduction in the pension obligations that
would result.
Group and Society
2025
2024
Change in
assumption
£m
£m
Principal actuarial assumption
Discount rate
-0.25%
(1.0)
(1.0)
Rate of increase in salaries
-0.25%
-
-
Rate of increase in pensions
-0.25%
0.5
0.2
Mortality age adjustment
+0.25%
(0.2)
0.2
Inflation
-0.25%
0.5
0.2
Sensitivities have been derived by re-running the balance sheet liability calculation with an isolated change to the assumption being analysed. For the inflation
assumption, the calculation includes the associated impact on salary increases, deferred revaluation and pension increases in payment.
The Scheme operates a Liability Driven Investment (“LDI”) strategy designed to hedge the interest rate and inflation risks associated with the funded liabilities.
This approach seeks to ensure that changes in market expectations for interest rates and inflation have a broadly corresponding effect on the value of the
Scheme’s LDI assets. Hedging is assessed using the ‘technical provisions’ basis at each triennial valuation.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page | 75 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Notes to the Accounts
for the years ended 31
st
December 2025 and 31
st
December 2024
28 Retirement benefit obligations (continued)
Group and Society
2025
2024
£m
£m
Fair value of scheme assets:
As at 1
st
January
42.9
45.8
Interest on pension scheme assets
2.2
2.0
Contributions by employer
0.2
0.6
Benefits paid
(2.6)
(2.5)
Expenses paid
(0.2)
(0.2)
Gains / (losses) on assets
0.3
(2.8)
As at 31
st
December
42.8
42.9
Present value of defined benefit obligations:
As at 1
st
January
(36.8)
(42.9)
Interest on pension scheme liabilities
(1.9)
(1.9)
Benefits paid
2.6
2.5
Experience loss on liabilities
(0.4)
1.5
Gain on changes in demographic assumptions
(0.3)
0.5
Gains on changes in financial assumptions
0.9
3.5
As at 31
st
December
(35.9)
(36.8)
Surplus in scheme at 31
st
December
6.9
6.1
Impact of asset ceiling
(6.9)
(6.1)
Liability in the Statement of Financial Position as at 31
st
December
-
-
In recognising the net surplus or deficit of the pension scheme, the funded status of the scheme is adjusted to reflect the funding requirement agreed by the
sponsor alongside the rights of any return of surplus, with the recognition of an asset ceiling liability. The actual return on plan assets was a £2.5m gain (2024:
£0.8m Loss).
The major categories of plan assets are as follows:
Group and Society
2025
2024
£m
£m
Investments quoted in active markets
Multi asset growth
9.1
9.0
Asset backed securities
15.0
15.6
Cash and cash equivalents
3.7
3.3
Unquoted investments
Liability driven investments
14.2
14.1
Secured pensioners
0.9
0.9
Fair value of scheme assets
42.9
42.9
Group and Society
2025
2024
£m
£m
Amounts recognised in finance cost in Income Statement:
Interest cost on pension scheme liabilities
(1.9)
(1.9)
Interest income on pension scheme assets
2.2
2.0
Interest on asset ceiling
(0.3)
(0.1)
-
-
The movement in the liability recognised in the Statement of Financial Position is as follows:
Group and Society
2025
2024
£m
£m
Opening defined benefit obligation at 1
st
January
-
(1.3)
Amount recognised in Income Statement
(0.2)
(0.2)
Employer contributions
0.2
0.6
Remeasurement gains
-
0.9
Closing defined benefit obligation as at 31
st
December
-
-
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page | 76 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Notes to the Accounts
for the years ended 31
st
December 2025 and 31
st
December 2024
28 Retirement benefit obligations (continued)
a) Defined benefits obligations
The amount recognised in the Statement of Other Comprehensive Income for remeasurement gains and losses is as follows:
Group and Society
2025
2024
£m
£m
Actual return less expected return on plan assets
0.3
(2.8)
Experience loss arising on scheme liabilities
(0.4)
1.4
Changes in financial assumptions underlying the present value of the scheme liabilities
0.9
3.5
Changes in demographic assumptions underlying the present value of the scheme liabilities
(0.3)
0.5
Change in impact of asset ceiling
(0.5)
(1.7)
Remeasurement of defined benefit obligation
-
0.9
The average duration of the defined benefit obligation as at 31
st
December 2025 is 11 years (2024 11 years). This number can be analysed as follows:
Group and Society
2025
2024
Years
Years
Active members
15
15
Deferred members
16
16
Retired members
9
9
The scheme is subject to the funding legislation outlined in the Pensions Act 2004. This, together with documents issued by the Pensions Regulator, and
Guidance Notes adopted by the Financial Reporting Council, sets out the framework for funding defined benefit occupational pension schemes in the UK.
During the year, the Group made contributions of £nil (2024: £0.5 million) as part of its funding plan.
b) Defined contribution obligations
The Group also operates contributory defined contribution schemes. The assets of these schemes are held separately from those of the Group. The pension
charge for the year represents contributions payable by the Group and Society to the schemes and amounted to £1.6m (2024: £1.1m). There were no
outstanding or prepaid contributions at either the beginning or end of the year.
29 Subscribed capital
Group and Society
2025
2024
£m
£m
7.875% sterling permanent interest-bearing shares
23.9
23.9
Fair value adjustment for hedged risk
0.1
0.1
24.0
24.0
The subscribed capital was issued for an indeterminate period and is only repayable in the event of the winding up of the Society. PIBS holders do not have any
right to a residual interest in the Society.
30 Fair value reserves
Group and Society
FVOCI reserve
FVOCI reserve
2025
2024
£m
£m
At 1
st
January
-
0.2
Fair value (losses) / gains on treasury assets
(1.9)
(0.5)
Amounts transferred to Income Statement on micro hedged relationships
1.9
0.3
At 31
st
December
-
-
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page | 77 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Notes to the Accounts
for the years ended 31
st
December 2025 and 31
st
December 2024
31 Financial instruments
Classification & Measurement
A financial instrument is a contract that gives rise to a financial asset or financial liability. NBS is a retailer of financial instruments, mainly in the form of mortgages
and savings products. The Group uses wholesale financial instruments to invest in liquid assets, raise wholesale funding and to manage the risks arising from its
operations.
The Group has a formal structure for managing risk, including established risk limits, reporting lines, mandates, credit risk appetite and other control procedures.
The Board Risk Committee (‘BRC’) is tasked with monitoring the Group’s overall exposure to risk, supported by the Executive Risk Committee (‘ERC’) and ALCo.
Four sub committees, the Retail Credit Committee (‘RCC’), Operational Risk Committee (‘ORC’), Legal, Regulatory Risk Committee (‘LRC’) and the Customer &
Conduct Risk Committee (‘CCRC’) monitor the individual areas of risk and report to the BRC quarterly.
ALCo, monitors Statement of Financial Position risks (including the use of derivative financial instruments), funding and liquidity in line with the Group’s prudent
policy statements as well as wholesale credit risk. The RCC ensures that the management of credit risk is consistent with the credit risk appetite statement.
Key performance indicators are provided to the ERC and Board monthly by the ALCo and RCC.
Instruments used for risk management purposes include derivative financial instruments (derivatives), which are contracts where the value is derived from one or
more underlying price, rate or index inherent in the contract or agreement, such as interest rates, exchange rates or stock market indices.
The objective of the Group in using derivatives is in accordance with the Building Societies Act 1986 and is to limit the extent to which the Group will be affected
by changes in interest rates. Derivatives are not used in trading activity or for speculative purposes.
The derivative instruments used by the Group in managing its Statement of Financial Position risk exposures are interest rate swaps. These are used to protect the
Group from exposures arising principally from fixed rate mortgage lending, fixed rate savings products and fixed rate wholesale funding. An interest rate swap is
a contract to exchange one set of interest rate cash flows for another. Such swaps result in the economic exchange of interest rates. No exchange of principal
takes place. Instead, interest payments are based on notional principal amounts agreed at inception of the swap. The duration of the interest rate swap is generally
short to medium-term and their maturity profile reflects the nature of the exposures arising from the underlying business activities.
The Group applies portfolio fair value hedging techniques to reduce its exposure to interest rate risk as follows:
Hedged item
Risk
Fair value interest rate hedge
Fixed rate mortgage
Increase in interest rates
Group pays fixed, receives variable
Fixed rate treasury asset
Increase in interest rates
Group pays fixed, receives variable
Fixed rate savings bond
Decrease in interest rates
Group receives fixed, pays variable
Fixed rate funding
Decrease in interest rates
Group receives fixed, pays variable
The fair values of these hedges as at 31
st
December 2025 are shown in Note 13.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page | 78 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Notes to the Accounts
for the years ended 31
st
December 2025 and 31
st
December 2024
31 Financial instruments (continued)
Classification & Measurement (continued)
Below are the summary terms and conditions and accounting policies of financial instruments held by the Group.
Financial instrument
Terms and conditions
Accounting policy: IFRS 9
Fixed or reference linked interest rate
Amortised cost
Loans and advances to credit institutions Fixed term Accounted for at settlement date
Short to medium-term maturity
Fixed or reference linked interest rate
Fair value through other comprehensive
Debt securities Fixed term income
Short to medium-term maturity
Accounted for at settlement date
Secured on residential property or land
Amortised cost
Loans and advances to members Standard maximum contractual term of 25 years Accounted for at settlement date
Fixed or variable rate interest
Equity investment
No fixed maturity
Fair value through profit or loss
Returns depend on investee performance
Accounted for at settlement date
Shares
Variable term
Amortised cost
Fixed or variable interest rates
Accounted for at settlement date
Fixed or reference linked interest rate
Amortised cost
Amounts owed to credit institutions Fixed term Accounted for at settlement date
Short to medium-term maturity
Fixed or reference linked interest rate
Amortised cost
Amounts owed to other members Fixed term Accounted for at settlement date
Short to medium-term maturity
Fixed or reference linked interest rate
Amortised cost
Debt securities in issue Fixed term Accounted for at settlement date
Short to medium-term maturity
Fixed interest rate
Amortised cost
Subscribed capital Issued for indeterminate period Accounted for at settlement date
Only repayable upon winding up of the Society
Fixed interest received / paid converted
Fair value through profit and loss
Derivative financial instruments to variable interest paid / received Accounted for at trade date
Based on notional value of the derivative
Financial assets and liabilities are measured on an ongoing basis either at fair value or at amortised cost. Note 1: ‘Accounting policies’ describes how the classes
of financial instruments are measured, and how income and expenses, including fair value gains and losses, are recognised. The tables below analyse the
Group’s assets and liabilities by financial classification:
Held at amortised
Held at fair value
Carrying values by category
cost
Fair value
through Profit
Financial Fair value Fair value and Loss - not in a
assets and through other through Profit hedge
Group liabilities at comprehensive and Loss relationship
As at 31
st
December 2025
amortised cost
income
Total
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
Financial assets
Cash in hand and balances with the Bank of
England
297.0
-
-
-
297.0
Loans and advances to credit institutions
69.3
-
-
-
69.3
Debt securities
-
704.8
-
-
704.8
Derivative financial instruments
-
-
25.9
3.5
29.4
Loans and advances to members
4,305.0
-
-
-
4,305.0
Other assets
30.8
-
-
-
30.8
4,702.1
704.8
25.9
3.5
5,436.3
Financial liabilities
Shares
4,631.2
-
-
-
4,631.2
Amounts owed to credit institutions
0.1
-
-
-
0.1
Amounts owed to other members
56.5
-
-
-
56.5
Debt securities in issue
408.9
-
-
-
408.9
Derivative financial instruments
-
-
27.0
4.2
31.2
Subscribed capital
24.0
-
-
-
24.0
Other liabilities
17.7
-
-
-
17.7
5,138.4
-
27.0
4.2
5,169.6
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page | 79 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Notes to the Accounts
for the years ended 31
st
December 2025 and 31
st
December 2024
31 Financial instruments (continued)
Classification & Measurement (continued)
Carrying values by category
Held at
Held at fair value
amortised cost
Financial
Fair value
Derivatives
Fair value through
assets and through other designated Profit and Loss - not in
Group liabilities at comprehensive as fair value a hedge relationship
As at 31
st
December 2024
amortised cost
income
hedges
Total
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
Financial assets
Cash in hand and balances with the Bank
441.2
-
-
-
441.2
of England
Loans and advances to credit institutions
21.6
-
-
-
21.6
Debt securities
-
454.2
-
-
454.2
Derivative financial instruments
-
-
69.0
11.9
80.9
Loans and advances to members
4,201.8
-
-
-
4,201.8
Convertible loan notes
-
-
1.1
-
1.1
Other assets
25.9
-
-
-
25.9
4,690.5
454.2
70.1
11.9
5,226.7
Financial liabilities
Shares
4,350.5
-
-
-
4,350.5
Amounts owed to credit institutions
327.1
-
-
-
327.1
Amounts owed to other members
45.4
-
-
-
45.4
Debt securities in issue
184.7
-
-
-
184.7
Derivative financial instruments
-
-
11.0
11.9
22.9
Subscribed capital
24.0
-
-
-
24.0
Other liabilities
18.8
-
-
-
18.8
4,950.5
-
11.0
11.9
4,973.4
Fair values of financial assets and liabilities carried at amortised cost
The table below analyses the book and fair values of the Group’s financial instruments held at amortised cost at 31
st
December:
Group
2025
2025
2024
2024
Book value
Fair value
Book value
Fair value
£m
£m
£m
£m
Financial assets
Cash in hand and balances with the Bank of England
a
297.0
297.0
441.2
441.2
Loans and advances to credit institutions
b
69.3
69.3
21.6
21.6
Loans and advances to members
c
4,305.0
4,360.8
4,201.8
4,229.8
Financial liabilities
Shares
d
4,631.2
4,623.4
4,350.5
4,347.7
Amounts owed to credit institutions
d
0.1
0.1
327.1
327.1
Amounts owed to other members
d
56.5
56.5
45.4
45.5
Debt securities in issue
e
409.0
409.0
184.7
184.7
Subscribed capital
f
24.0
29.6
24.0
26.1
Fair value is the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the
measurement date. The estimated fair value of the financial assets and liabilities above has been calculated using the following valuation methodology:
a) Cash in hand
The fair value of cash in hand and deposits is its carrying amount.
b) Loans and advances to credit institutions – Level 2
The fair value of overnight deposits is the amount repayable on demand.
The estimated fair value of collateral loans and advances to credit institutions is derived using valuation techniques that use observable market inputs.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page | 80 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Notes to the Accounts
for the years ended 31
st
December 2025 and 31
st
December 2024
31 Financial instruments (continued)
Fair values of financial assets and liabilities carried at amortised cost (continued)
c) Loans and advances to members – Level 3
Loans and advances are recorded net of provisions for impairment together with the fair value adjustment for hedged items. The estimated fair value of loans
and advances represents the discounted amount of estimated future cash flows expected to be received taking account of expected prepayment rates.
Estimated cash flows are discounted at prevailing market rates for items of similar remaining maturity. The fair values have been adjusted where necessary to
reflect any observable market conditions at the time of valuation.
d) Shares, deposits and borrowings – Level 3
The fair value of shares and deposits and other borrowings with no stated maturity is the amount repayable on demand.
The fair value of fixed interest bearing deposits and other borrowings without a quoted market price is based on expected future cash flows determined by
the contractual terms and conditions discounted at prevailing market rates for items of similar remaining maturity.
e) Debt securities in issue – Level 2
The fair value is calculated using a discounted cash flow model. Expected cash flows are discounted at prevailing market rates for items of similar remaining
maturity.
f) Subscribed capital – Level 1
The estimated fair value of fixed interest bearing debt is based on its active market price as at the period end.
Fair values of financial assets and liabilities carried at fair value
The table below summarises the fair values of the Group’s financial assets and liabilities that are accounted for at fair value, analysed by the valuation
methodology used by the Group to derive the financial instruments fair value:
Group
2025
2025
2025
2025
2024
2024
2024
2024
Level
Level 2
Level 3
Total
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Total
1
Notes
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
Financial assets
FVOCI – Debt securities
12
704.8
-
-
704.8
454.2
-
-
454.2
Equity investments
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Convertible loan notes
-
-
-
-
-
-
1.1
1.1
Derivative financial instruments:
13
-
29.4
-
29.4
-
80.9
-
80.9
interest rate swaps
704.8
29.4
-
734.2
454.2
80.9
1.1
536.2
Financial liabilities
Derivative financial instruments:
13
-
(31.2)
-
(31.2)
-
(22.9)
-
(22.9)
interest rate swaps
-
(31.2)
-
(31.2)
-
(22.9)
-
(22.9)
Valuation techniques
The following is a description of the determination of fair value for financial instruments, which are accounted for at fair value using valuation techniques.
The fair value hierarchy detailed in IFRS 13: ‘Fair Value Measurement’ splits the source of input when deriving fair values into three levels, as follows:
• Level 1 – quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities;
• Level 2 – inputs other than quoted prices included within Level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability either directly or indirectly; and
• Level 3 – inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data.
The main valuation techniques employed by the Group to establish fair value of the financial instruments disclosed above are set out below:
Debt securities
• Level 1 – Market prices have been used to determine the fair value of listed debt securities; and
• Level 2 – Debt securities for which there is no readily available traded price are valued based on the ‘present value’ method. This requires expected future
principal and interest cash flows to be discounted using prevailing yield curves. The yield curves are generally observable market data which is derived
from quoted interest rates in similar time bandings, which match the timings of the cash flows and maturities of the instruments.
Equity investments
For unlisted equity investments where there is no observable market price, valuation is based on techniques such as discounted cash flow or comparable company
multiples. These models use unobservable inputs like forecast earnings, discount rates, and growth assumptions.
Convertible loan notes
The fair value of convertible loan notes at inception is equal to the transaction price. The subsequent valuation model takes account of the outstanding debt,
conversion options and potential future equity value.
Interest rate swaps
The valuation of interest rate swaps is also based on the ‘present value’ method. Expected interest cash flows are discounted using the prevailing SONIA yield
curves. The yield curves are generally observable market data which is derived from quoted interest rates in similar time bandings which match the timings of
the interest cash flows and maturities of the instruments. All swaps are fully collateralised and therefore no adjustment is required for credit risk in the fair value
of derivatives.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page | 81 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Notes to the Accounts
for the years ended 31
st
December 2025 and 31
st
December 2024
31 Financial instruments (continued)
Fair values of financial assets and liabilities carried at fair value (continued)
Transfers between fair value hierarchies
Transfers between fair value hierarchies occur when either it becomes possible to value a financial instrument using a method that is higher up the valuation
hierarchy or it is no longer possible to value it using the current method and it must instead be valued using a method lower down the hierarchy. There have
been no transfers during the current or previously reported periods.
Credit risk
Credit risk is the risk that the Group incurs a financial loss arising from the failure of a member or counterparty to meet their contractual obligations. The Group
structures the level of credit risk it undertakes, by maintaining a credit governance framework involving delegated approval authority levels and credit
procedures, the objective of which is to build and maintain risk asset portfolios of high quality.
The Group’s maximum credit risk exposure is detailed in the table below:
Group and Society
2025
2024
£m
£m
Credit risk exposure
Cash in hand and balances with the Bank of England
297.0
441.2
Loans and advances to credit institutions
69.3
21.6
Debt securities
704.8
454.2
Derivative financial instruments
29.4
80.9
Loans and advances to members
4,305.0
4,201.8
Convertible loan notes
-
1.1
Total Statement of Financial Position exposure
5,405.5
5,200.8
Off Balance Sheet exposure – mortgage commitments
233.2
453.1
5,638.7
5,653.9
a) Loans and advances to credit institutions, debt securities and derivative financial instruments
The ERC, supported by ALCo, is responsible for approving treasury counterparties for both derivatives and investment purposes, within the Board’s risk
appetite. Limits are placed on the amount of risk accepted in relation to one counterparty, or group of counterparties, and to industry sectors. This is
monitored weekly by the Society’s Treasury team and reviewed monthly by the ALCo.
The Group’s policy only permits lending to central government (which includes the BoE), UK local authorities, banks with a high credit rating and building
societies. The Group’s Treasury team perform regular analysis of counterparty credit risk and monitoring of publicly available information to highlight
possible indirect exposures.
An analysis of the Group’s treasury asset concentration is shown in the table below:
Group
2025
2025
2024
2024
£m
%
£m
%
Industry sector
Banks
287.2
26.8
206.9
22.5
Building societies
113.2
10.6
100.7
11.0
Multilateral Development Banks
131.3
12.2
59.4
6.5
Central Government
539.4
50.4
550.0
60.0
1,071.1
917.0
Group
2025
AAA
AA
A
2024
£m
%
%
%
£m
Geographic region
United Kingdom
920.9
62.2
-
37.8
857.6
United States of America
18.9
-
-
100.0
-
Multilateral Development banks
131.3
100.0
-
-
59.4
1,071.1
917.0
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page | 82 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Notes to the Accounts
for the years ended 31
st
December 2025 and 31
st
December 2024
31 Financial instruments (continued)
Credit risk (continued)
a) Loans and advances to credit institutions, debt securities and derivative financial instruments (continued)
The Group has no exposure to foreign exchange risk. All instruments are denominated in sterling. The Group also has no direct exposure to any sovereign
states, other than the UK.
The Group’s derivative financial instruments are fully collateralised with a central clearing house in the UK and as a result there is no exposure to the Group.
All of the Group’s treasury assets are classified as Stage 1 for ECL calculation purposes under IFRS 9 and there are no impairment charges against any of the
Group’s treasury assets as at 31
st
December 2025 (2024: £nil).
b) Loans and advances to members
All mortgage loan applications are assessed with reference to the Group’s retail credit risk appetite statement and Lending policy, which includes assessing
applicants for potential fraud risk, which is approved by the Board. When deciding on the overall risk appetite that the Group wishes to adopt, both numerical
and non-numerical considerations are taken into account, along with data on the current UK economic climate, portfolio information derived from the Group’s
rating system and competitor activity. The statement must comply with all the prevailing regulatory policy and framework.
The lending portfolio is monitored by the RCC to ensure that it remains in line with the stated risk appetite of the Group, including adherence to the lending
principles, policies and lending limits.
For new members, the first element of the Retail Credit Control Framework is achieved via credit scoring, which assesses the credit quality of potential
members prior to making loan offers. The members’ credit score combines demographic and financial information. A second element is lending policy rules,
which are applied to new applications to ensure that they meet the risk appetite of the Group. All mortgage applications are overseen by the Lending Services
team who ensure that any additional lending criteria are applied and that all information submitted within the application is validated.
For existing members who have been added to the lending portfolio, Management use behavioural scorecards to review the ongoing creditworthiness of
members by determining the likelihood of them defaulting over a rolling 12-month period together with the amount of loss if they do default. The continual
assessment of customer risk of default is used to assess the member’s suitability for further lending as well as feed into strategic decision making processes,
such as the corporate plan. Models used within the member rating process are monitored in line with industry best practice and to provide insight into
changes observed within the mortgage portfolios.
Credit risk management information is comprehensive and is circulated to the RCC on a monthly basis to ensure that the portfolio remains within the Group’s
risk appetite.
It is the Group’s policy to ensure good member outcomes and lend responsibly by ensuring at the outset that the member can meet the mortgage
repayments. This is achieved by obtaining specific information from the member concerning income and expenditure but also external credit reference agency
data.
The Group does not have any exposure to the sub-prime market.
The maximum credit risk exposure is disclosed in the table on page 81.
Loans and advances to members are predominantly made up of retail loans fully secured against UK residential property of £3,569.9 million (2024: £3,650.3
million), split between residential and BTL loans with the remaining £716.8 million (2024: £589.5 million) secured on secured business lending.
The Group operates throughout England and Wales with the portfolio well spread throughout the geographic regions. An analysis of the Group’s geographical
concentration is shown in the table below:
2025
2024
Group and Society
%
%
Geographical analysis
Eastern
11.1
10.7
East Midlands
10.5
11.7
London
17.3
15.4
North East
3.1
3.6
North West
10.2
10.4
South East
18.0
17.4
South West
9.6
9.6
Wales
3.4
3.4
West Midlands
8.5
8.7
Yorkshire & Humberside
8.3
9.0
Other
-
0.1
100.0
100.0
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page | 83 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Notes to the Accounts
for the years ended 31
st
December 2025 and 31
st
December 2024
31 `Financial instruments (continued)
Credit risk (continued)
b) Loans and advances to members (continued)
Retail loans (loans fully secured on residential properties)
Loans fully secured on residential property are split between residential and traditional BTL. The average LTV is the mean LTV for the portfolio. Each individual
LTV is calculated by comparing the value of the mortgage loan to the value of collateral held adjusted by a house price index. The simple average LTV of
residential mortgages is 53.0% (2024: 52.4%).
The indexed LTV analysis on the Group’s residential mortgage portfolio is shown below:
Group and Society
2025
2025
2024
2024
Residential
BTL
Residential
BTL
%
%
%
%
Loan to Value analysis
< 60%
39.2
65.4
40.0
68.9
60% - 80%
35.3
34.5
35.8
31.1
80% - 90%
21.2
0.1
19.6
-
> 90%
4.3
-
4.6
-
100.0
100.0
100.0
100.0
Average loan to value of loans
53.0
49.7
52.4
50.0
Average loan to value of new business
70.0
63.7
69.7
61.0
The quality of the Group’s retail mortgage book is reflected in the number and value of accounts in arrears. By volume 0.35% (2024: 0.25%) of loans are three
months or more in arrears and by value it is 0.33% (2024: 0.20%).
The main factor for loans moving into arrears tends to be the condition of the general economic environment. In general, the lower the loan-to-value percentage,
the greater the equity within the property, and the lower the losses expected to be realised in the event of default or repossession.
The table below shows the fair value of collateral held for residential mortgages.
Group and Society
2025
2025
2024
2024
Indexed
Unindexed
Indexed
Unindexed
£m
£m
£m
£m
Value of collateral held:
Stage 1: 12-month expected credit losses
6,602.2
5,764.9
6,485.1
5,596.4
Stage 2: Lifetime expected credit losses
442.4
375.1
776.1
606.8
Stage 3: Lifetime expected credit losses
56.5
45.6
45.0
32.3
7,101.1
6,185.6
7,306.2
6,235.5
The collateral held consists of residential property. Collateral values are adjusted by the ONS Property Price Index to derive the indexed valuation at 31
st
December. This is the UK’s longest running house price index and takes into account regional data from the 12 standard planning regions of the UK. The Group
uses the index to update the property values of its residential and BTL portfolios on a quarterly basis.
With collateral capped to the amount of outstanding debt, the value of collateral held against loans in Stages 2 and 3 under IFRS 9 and which are in arrears, is
£31.5 million as at 31
st
December 2025 (2024: £23.0 million).
The decrease in the collateral held in relation to loans classified in Stage 2 and the increase in the collateral held in relation loans classified in Stage 1 primarily
reflects the movement of loans to between Stage 1 and 2 in the year.
Retail mortgages are fully secured against residential property. At origination, valuation of collateral is carried out in accordance with our lending policy using
appropriate valuation methods This includes the use of automated valuation models (AVMs) developed using market data and applied subject to high levels of
confidence. The valuations are subsequently indexed through the life of the product life.
The Loan-to-Value (LTV) is the primary driver of credit risk within the retail mortgage portfolio. Lower LTVs indicate high borrower equity and consequentially
higher loss absorption capacity leading to lower expected losses in the event of default and repossession.
The Group’s residential mortgage exposures and provisions may be disaggregated by probability of default ranges as follows:
Group and Society
2025
2025
2024
2024
Gross loans
Expected
Gross loans
Expected
Credit Loss
Credit Loss
PD %
£m
£m
£m
£m
0% - 2.5%
5.8
-
3.2
-
2.5% - 5.0%
748.5
0.4
5.4
-
5.0% - 7.5%
2,444.4
1.1
2,140.3
1.3
7.5% - 10.0%
173.5
0.2
1,239.1
1.0
10% – 100%
197.7
0.9
262.3
0.8
3,569.9
2.6
3,650.3
3.1
The movement in the exposures to lower PD bands in the year is reflective of an improved macroeconomic outlook at the end of 2025 compared to 2024.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page | 84 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Notes to the Accounts
for the years ended 31
st
December 2025 and 31
st
December 2024
31 Financial instruments (continued)
Credit risk (continued)
b) Loans and advances to members (continued)
Retail loans (continued)
The table below provides information on retail gross loans and ECL stages split by the number of days past due (‘DPD’):
Group and Society
2025
2025
2024
2024
Expected
Expected
Gross loans
Credit Loss
Gross loans
Credit Loss
£m
£m
£m
£m
Stage 1: 12-month expected credit losses
< 30 days past due
3,301.0
1.6
3,279.7
2.3
Stage 2: Lifetime expected credit losses
< 30 days past due
225.6
0.7
338.8
0.6
> 30 days past due
15.0
0.1
13.1
0.1
Stage 3: Lifetime expected credit losses
< 90 days past due
16.5
0.1
11.6
0.1
> 90 days past due
11.8
0.1
7.1
-
3,569.9
2.6
3,650.3
3.1
Forbearance
Temporary interest only concessions were historically offered to members in financial difficulty on a temporary basis with formal periodic review. The
concession allowed the member to reduce monthly payments to cover interest only, and if made, the arrears status will not increase. Interest only concessions
are no longer offered and have been replaced by reduced payment concessions.
Reduced payment concessions allow a member to make an agreed underpayment for a specific period of time. The monthly underpaid amount accrues as
arrears and agreement is reached at the end of the concession period on how the arrears will be repaid.
Payment plans are agreed to enable members to reduce their arrears balances by an agreed amount per month, which is paid in addition to their standard
monthly repayment.
Capitalisations occur where arrears are added to the capital balance outstanding for the purposes of restructuring the loan.
The term of the mortgage is extended in order to reduce payments to a level that is affordable to the member based on their current financial circumstances.
All forbearance arrangements are formally discussed with the member and reviewed by management prior to acceptance of the forbearance arrangement. By
offering members in financial difficulty the option of forbearance, the Society potentially exposes itself to an increased level of risk through prolonging the
period of non-contractual payment and / or potentially placing the member into a detrimental position at the end of the forbearance period.
Regular monitoring of the level and different types of forbearance activity are reported to the RCC on a monthly basis and the CCRC monitors the level of arrears
and forbearance cases. In addition, all forbearance arrangements are reviewed and discussed with the member on a regular basis to assess the ongoing
potential risk to the Society and suitability of the arrangement for the member.
The table below details the number of forbearance cases within the retail loans category:
2025
2024
Group and Society
Number
Number
Type of Forbearance
Interest only concessions
-
-
Reduced payment concessions
2
1
Payment plans
36
13
Capitalisations
30
32
Mortgage term extensions
31
28
Less: cases with more than one form of forbearance
(28)
(26)
71
48
These cases are covered by an IFRS 9 ECL allowance of £33,997 (2024: £19,644). In total, £9.5 million (2024: £3.7 million) of loans are subject to forbearance and
these loans are secured against property with an indexed valuation of £23.1 million (2024: £11.6 million).
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page | 85 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Notes to the Accounts
for the years ended 31
st
December 2025 and 31
st
December 2024
31 Financial instruments (continued)
Credit risk (continued)
b) Loans and advances to members (continued)
Secured Business Loans
SBL loans are primarily made available to Small and Medium sized enterprises for either owner occupied or investment property purposes and includes limited
company BTL loans. Loans are also only granted against the ‘bricks and mortar’ valuation of the property and not against working capital or machinery etc.
The make-up of the SBL book as at 31
st
December is as follows:
2025
2025
2024
2024
Group and Society
£m
%
£m
%
Owner occupied
28.6
4.0
33.8
5.7
Investment property
688.2
96.0
555.7
94.3
716.8
100.0
589.5
100.0
The table below provides information on the original LTV of the Group’s SBL mortgage portfolio:
2025
2024
Group and Society
%
%
Loan to Value analysis
< 60%
17.6
20.3
60% - 80%
79.9
78.6
80% - 90%
2.3
0.8
> 90%
0.2
0.3
100.0
100.0
Average loan to value of loans
61.3
50.9
Average loan to value of new business
70.9
68.1
The table below shows the fair value of collateral held for SBL loans:
2025
2025
2024
2024
Group and Society
Indexed
Unindexed
Indexed
Unindexed
£m
£m
£m
£m
Value of collateral held:
Stage 1: 12-month expected credit losses
1,142.4
1,084.2
948.4
902.9
Stage 2: Lifetime expected credit losses
54.8
53.5
51.1
49.3
Stage 3: Lifetime expected credit losses
13.4
12.3
17.0
16.7
1,210.6
1,150.0
1,016.5
968.9
Collateral reflects the latest valuation completed. If a property has had a desktop valuation since the latest full valuation, the collateral reflects the desktop
valuation. 12.0% of the SBL book has had a desktop valuation (2024: 15.6%).
With collateral capped to the amount of outstanding debt, the value of collateral held against loans in Stages 2 and 3 under IFRS 9 and which are in arrears, is
£6.4 million as at 31
st
December 2025 (2024: £5.3 million).
The Group’s SBL mortgage exposures and provisions may be disaggregated by probability of default ranges as follows:
Group and Society
2025
2025
2024
2024
Gross loans
Expected Credit
Gross loans
Expected
Loss
Credit Loss
PD %
£m
£m
£m
£m
0% - 2.5%
0.1
-
0.3
-
2.5% - 5.0%
455.1
0.7
0.5
-
5.0% - 7.5%
169.6
0.3
459.5
1.0
7.5% - 10.0%
10.9
-
34.2
0.1
10% – 100%
81.1
0.9
95.0
1.0
716.8
1.9
589.5
2.1
The movement in the exposures to lower PD bands in the year is reflective of an improved macroeconomic outlook at the end of 2025 compared to 2024.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page | 86 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Notes to the Accounts
for the years ended 31
st
December 2025 and 31
st
December 2024
31 Financial instruments (continued)
Credit risk (continued)
b) Loans and advances to members (continued)
Secured Business Loans (continued)
The table below provides information on SBL gross loans and ECL stages split by the number of days past due (‘DPD’):
Group and Society
2025
2025
2024
2024
Expected
Expected
Gross loans
Credit Loss
Gross loans
Credit Loss
£m
£m
£m
£m
Stage 1: 12 month expected credit losses
< 30 days past due
676.5
1.2
550.0
1.4
Stage 2: Lifetime expected credit losses
< 30 days past due
30.9
0.3
29.9
0.3
> 30 days past due
4.0
0.1
2.0
-
Stage 3: Lifetime expected credit losses
< 90 days past due
4.0
0.2
5.7
0.2
> 90 days past due
1.4
0.1
1.9
0.2
716.8
1.9
589.5
2.1
In terms of SBL risk, the single largest borrower represents less than 0.2% (2024: 0.2%) of the SBL mortgage book.
Forbearance
The Group has various forbearance options to support members who may find themselves in financial difficulty. These include ‘interest only’ concessions,
renegotiation of contractual payment, payment plans and capitalisations.
‘Interest only’ concessions are offered to members in financial difficulty on a temporary basis with formal periodic review. The concession allows the member
to reduce monthly payments to cover interest only, and if made, the arrears status will not increase.
Renegotiation of contractual payments is provided to reduce the monthly payment to a level affordable by the member. The agreement remains within the
Society’s Lending policy, for example within the maximum mortgage term.
Payment plans are agreed to enable members to reduce their arrears balances by an agreed amount per month which is paid in addition to their standard
monthly repayment.
Capitalisations occur where arrears are added to the capital balance outstanding for the purpose of restructuring the loan.
The table below shows those loans subject to forbearance within the SBL loans category:
2025
2024
Group and Society
Number
Number
Type of Forbearance
Interest only concessions
14
20
Active payment plan
5
5
Capitalisation
1
-
Mortgage term extensions
1
5
Less: cases with more than one form of forbearance
(1)
(2)
20
28
These cases are covered by an IFRS 9 ECL allowance of £78,000 (2024: £149,000). In total, £2.7 million (2024: £4.5 million) of loans are subject to forbearance
and these loans are secured against property with an indexed valuation of £7.2 million (2024: £11.0 million).
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page | 87 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Notes to the Accounts
for the years ended 31
st
December 2025 and 31
st
December 2024
31 Financial instruments (continued)
Liquidity risk
Liquidity risk is the risk that the Society will not have sufficient financial resources available to meet its obligations as they fall due, under either normal business
conditions or a stressed environment. It is the Society’s policy that a significant amount of its total assets are carried in the form of cash and other readily
realisable assets in order to:
i) meet day-to-day business needs;
ii) meet any unexpected cash needs;
iii) maintain public confidence; and
iv) ensure maturity mismatches are provided for.
Monitoring of liquidity, in line with the Society’s prudent policy framework, is performed daily. Compliance with these policies is reported to ALCo monthly and
through to the ERC and BRC.
The Society’s Liquidity policy is designed to ensure the Society has sufficient liquid resources to withstand a range of stressed scenarios. A series of liquidity
stress tests have been developed as part of the Internal Liquidity Adequacy Assessment process (‘ILAAP’). They include scenarios that fulfil the specific
requirements of the PRA (the idiosyncratic, Market-wide and Combined stress tests) and scenarios identified by the Society which are specific to its business
model. The stress tests are performed monthly and reported to ALCo to confirm that the liquidity policy remains appropriate.
The Society’s liquid resources comprise high quality liquid assets, including a Bank of England reserves account, Gilts, time deposits and investment grade fixed
and floating rate notes issued by highly rated financial institutions, supplemented by unencumbered mortgage assets. At the end of the year the ratio of liquid
assets to shares and deposits was 21.0% compared to 18.7% at the end of 2024.
The Society maintains a contingency funding plan, as part of its RRP process, to ensure that it has so far as possible, sufficient liquid financial resources to meet
liabilities as they fall due under each of the scenarios.
The table below analyses the Group’s assets and liabilities into relevant maturity groupings, based on the remaining period to contractual maturity at the
Statement of Financial Position date. This is not representative of the Group’s management of liquidity. Loans and advances to members rarely run their full
course. The actual repayment profile is likely to be significantly different from that shown in the analysis. For example, most mortgages have a contractual
maturity of around 25 years but are generally repaid much sooner. The average life of a mortgage at the Group, currently in product, is lower than the fixed rate
term (2024: lower). Conversely, retail deposits repayable on demand generally remain on the Balance Sheet much longer.
More than More than one
Group Not more three months year but not
Residual maturity than three but not more more than five More than
as at 31
st
December 2025
On demand
months
than one year
years
five years
Total
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
Financial assets
Liquid assets
Cash in hand and balances with
the Bank of England
297.0
-
-
-
-
297.0
Loans and advances to credit
29.6
39.7
-
-
-
69.3
institutions
Debt securities
-
100.3
91.1
473.6
39.8
704.8
Total liquid assets
326.6
140.0
91.1
473.6
39.8
1,071.1
Derivative financial instruments
-
4.4
11.8
12.6
0.6
29.4
Loans and advances to members
50.7
47.4
238.6
1,136.6
2,831.7
4,305.0
Other assets
-
3.0
8.6
0.9
18.3
30.8
377.3
194.8
350.1
1,623.7
2,890.4
5,436.3
Financial liabilities and reserves
Shares
1,121.2
1,254.3
1,188.1
1,064.5
3.1
4,631.2
Amounts owed to credit
0.1
-
-
-
-
0.1
institutions
Amounts owed to other members
0.7
40.2
15.6
-
-
56.5
Debt securities in issue
-
-
130.3
278.6
-
408.9
Derivative financial instruments
-
0.2
1.5
29.0
0.5
31.2
Subscribed capital
-
0.1
-
-
23.9
24.0
Reserves
-
-
-
-
266.7
266.7
Other liabilities
2.9
6.9
5.2
2.2
0.5
17.7
1,124.9
1,301.7
1,340.7
1,374.3
294.7
5,436.3
Net liquidity gap
(747.6)
(1,106.9)
(990.6)
249.4
2,595.7
-
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page | 88 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Notes to the Accounts
for the years ended 31
st
December 2025 and 31
st
December 2024
31 Financial instruments (continued)
Liquidity risk (continued)
More than
three More than
months but one year but
Group Not more not more not more
Residual maturity than three than one than five More than
as at 31
st
December 2024
On demand
months
year
years
five years
Total
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
Financial assets
Liquid assets
Cash in hand and balances with the Bank
441.2
-
-
-
-
441.2
of England
Loans and advances to credit institutions
9.3
12.3
-
-
-
21.6
Debt securities
-
21.1
87.1
343.3
2.7
454.2
Total liquid assets
450.5
33.4
87.1
343.3
2.7
917.0
Derivative financial instruments
-
4.0
15.9
58.8
2.2
80.9
Loans and advances to members
3.1
82.7
177.6
1,002.3
2,936.1
4,201.8
Convertible loan notes
-
-
1.1
-
-
1.1
Other assets
-
4.2
4.6
0.8
16.3
25.9
453.6
124.3
286.3
1,405.2
2,957.3
5,226.7
Financial liabilities and reserves
Shares
1,086.8
672.4
1,498.0
1,093.1
0.2
4,350.5
Amounts owed to credit institutions
18.7
40.7
267.7
-
-
327.1
Amounts owed to other members
0.7
17.5
27.2
-
-
45.4
Debt securities in issue
-
-
-
184.7
-
184.7
Derivative financial instruments
-
0.7
0.9
21.2
0.1
22.9
Subscribed capital
-
0.1
-
-
23.9
24.0
Reserves
-
-
-
-
253.3
253.3
Other liabilities
2.6
9.7
3.8
2.3
0.4
18.8
1,108.8
741.1
1,797.6
1,301.3
277.9
5,226.7
Net liquidity gap
(655.2)
(616.8)
(1,511.3)
103.9
2,679.4
-
There is no material difference between the maturity profile for the Group and that for the Society. As at 31
st
December 2025, £997.8 million (2024: £919.6
million) of the Group’s assets were encumbered.
The following is an analysis of gross undiscounted contractual cash flows payable under financial liabilities:
More than
More than one
three months year but not
Group Repayable on Not more than but not more more than five More than
31
st
December 2025
demand
three months
than one year
years
five years
Total
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
Shares
1,316.5
1,253.7
1,186.1
1,061.9
3.1
4,821.3
Amounts owed to credit institutions
0.1
-
-
-
-
0.1
Amounts owed to other members
0.7
283.8
52.2
-
-
336.7
Debt securities in issue
-
20.8
172.0
216.2
-
409.0
Derivative financial instruments
0.3
13.8
19.2
(0.1)
-
33.2
Subscribed capital
-
0.5
1.5
7.9
23.9
33.8
Total liabilities
1,317.6
1,572.6
1,431.0
1,285.9
27.0
5,634.1
Group
31
st
December 2024
Shares
1,264.0
672.5
1,497.8
1,092.9
0.2
4,527.4
Amounts owed to credit institutions
17.9
43.0
273.5
-
-
334.4
Amounts owed to other members
0.8
18.3
29.3
-
-
48.4
Debt securities in issue
-
8.9
30.5
145.7
-
185.1
Derivative financial instruments
-
(0.1)
0.2
20.8
-
20.9
Subscribed capital
-
0.5
1.5
7.9
23.9
33.8
Total liabilities
1,282.7
743.1
1,832.8
1,267.3
24.1
5,150.0
The analysis of gross contractual cash flows differs from the analysis of residual maturity due to the inclusion of interest accrued at current rates, for the
average period until maturity on the amounts outstanding at the Statement of Financial Position date.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page | 89 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Notes to the Accounts
for the years ended 31
st
December 2025 and 31
st
December 2024
31 Financial instruments (continued)
Market and interest rate risk
Market risk is the risk of changes to the Society’s financial condition caused by market interest rates. The Society is exposed to market risk in the form of changes
(or potential changes) in the general level of interest rates and changes in the relationship between different types of interest rates (basis risk).
The Society aims to undertake the hedging of individual transactions within an overall strategy for structural hedging, based on a detailed analysis of the
Statement of Financial Position.
The management of interest rate risk is based on a full Statement of Financial Position gap analysis. The Statement of Financial Position is subjected to a range
of stress tests, including a 2% change (up and down) in interest rates on a weekly basis. The results are measured against the risk appetite for market risk. In
addition, Management review interest rate basis risk and its potential impact on earnings. Risk positions are reviewed monthly by the ALCo and reported through
to the ERC and BRC.
The table below summarises the Group’s exposure to interest rate risk:
2025
2024
Group and Society
£m
£m
Changes in market value economic value (including capital) from a 2% parallel upward shift in interest rates
(0.6)
(4.6)
Earnings impact from a 2% parallel downward shift in interest rates over the proceeding 12-months
(4.1)
(6.1)
The key assumptions used in this modelling are as follows:
i) for Economic Value measures, the Balance Sheet at the report date is run-off over its remaining expected duration;
ii) for Earnings measures, the metric uses the Society’s latest forecast Balance Sheet ;
iii) the effect of external hedging is included; and
iv) downward shocks allow the yield curve to go negative subject to a floor.
There is no material difference between the interest rate risk profile for the Group and that for the Society.
The Group is not exposed to foreign currency risk.
The Society does not have any financial assets or liabilities that are offset with the net amount presented in the Statement of Financial Position, as the applicable
accounting standards require both an enforceable right to set off and the intention to settle on a net basis or to realise the asset and settle the liability
simultaneously. Neither of these conditions are met by the Society.
All financial assets and liabilities are presented on a gross basis in the Statement of Financial Position.
The Society centrally clears its derivative instruments, which requires it to enter into Credit Support Annexes (‘CSAs’) and which typically provide for the exchange
of collateral on a daily basis to mitigate net mark to market credit exposure.
The following table shows the impact on derivative financial instruments and repurchase agreements after collateral:
2025
2025
2025
2024
2024
2024
Group and Society
Gross
Financial
Net amounts
Gross
Financial
Net amounts
amounts
collateral *
amounts
collateral *
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
Financial assets
Derivative financial instruments
29.4
(29.4)
-
80.9
(80.9)
-
Total financial assets
29.4
(29.4)
-
80.9
(80.9)
-
Financial liabilities
Derivative financial instruments
31.2
(31.2)
-
22.9
(22.9)
-
Total financial liabilities
31.2
(31.2)
-
22.9
(22.9)
-
* Financial collateral disclosed is limited to the amount of the related financial asset and liability.
Fair value hedges
The Group holds a portfolio of fixed rate mortgages and savings products as well as fixed rate treasury assets and PIBS, it is therefore exposed to changes in fair
value due to movements in market interest rates. The Group manages this risk exposure by entering into pay fixed / receive floating interest rate swaps for its
fixed rate assets and pay floating / receive fixed interest rate swaps to hedge its fixed rate liabilities.
Only the interest rate risk element is hedged and therefore other risks, such as credit risk, are managed separately but are not managed through hedged
derivative financial instruments by the Group.
The interest rate risk component is determined as the change in the fair value of the hedged item arising solely from changes in the appropriate 3-month
benchmark rate of interest (SONIA). Such changes are usually the largest component of the overall change in fair value. This strategy is designated as a fair value
hedge and its effectiveness is assessed by comparing changes in the fair value of the hedged item attributable to changes in the benchmark rate of interest with
changes in the fair value of the interest rate swaps. The Group establishes the hedging ratio by matching the notional of the derivatives with the principal of the
hedged items. Possible sources of ineffectiveness are as follows:
• differences between the expected and actual volumes of prepayments, as the Group hedges to the expected repayment date taking into account expected
prepayments based on past experience;
• difference in the discounting between the hedged item and the hedging instrument, as cash collateralised interest rate swaps are discounted using the
relevant reference rate discount curves, which are not applied to the fixed rate mortgages; and
• hedging derivatives with a non-zero fair value at the date of initial designation as a hedging instrument.
The exposure from mortgage and savings portfolios frequently changes due to new loans / savings accounts originated, contractual repayments and early
prepayments in each period. As a result, the Group adopts a dynamic hedging strategy (sometimes referred to as a ‘macro’ or ‘portfolio’ hedge) to hedge the
exposure profile by closing and entering into new swap agreements at each month-end. The Group uses the portfolio fair value hedge of interest rate risk to
recognise fair value changes related to changes in interest rate risk in the relevant portfolio, and therefore reduce the profit or loss volatility that would otherwise
arise from changes in fair value of the interest rate swaps alone.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page | 90 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Notes to the Accounts
for the years ended 31
st
December 2025 and 31
st
December 2024
31 Financial instruments (continued)
Market and interest rate risk (continued)
Fair value hedges (continued)
The following table details the derivatives designated as fair value hedges included in the derivative financial instruments line of the Group’s Consolidated
Statement of Financial Position:
2025
2025
2025
2025
Group and Society
Changes in fair
Contract / value used for
notional Fair value of Fair value of calculating hedge
amount
Assets
Liabilities
ineffectiveness
£m
£m
£m
£m
Derivatives designated as fair value hedges for interest rate risk (Note 13)
Held against fixed rate mortgages
2,922.8
20.2
(24.8)
(51.0)
Held against fixed rate treasury assets
185.3
-
(1.9)
(2.2)
Held against fixed rate savings
1,887.0
5.7
(0.3)
4.2
4,995.1
25.9
(27.0)
(49.0)
2024
2024
2024
2024
Group and Society
Changes in fair
Contract / value used for
notional Fair value of Fair value of calculating hedge
amount
Assets
Liabilities
ineffectiveness
£m
£m
£m
£m
Derivatives designated as fair value hedges for interest rate risk (Note 13)
Held against fixed rate mortgages
3,000.2
67.6
(10.1)
(4.0)
Held against fixed rate treasury assets
48.3
0.5
-
0.3
Held against fixed rate savings
1,662.0
1.4
(0.9)
1.6
4,710.5
69.5
(11.0)
(2.1)
Derivative financial instruments (Note 13) includes the accumulated unamortised fair value hedge adjustments of £3.5m (2024: £0.5m) related to hedges that
have been discontinued and are now amortised.
The following table details the hedge exposures covered by the Group’s hedging strategies:
2025
2025
2025
2025
2025
2025
Group and Society
Change in fair
value of hedged
Accumulated amount of fair item for
Carrying amount of hedged value adjustments on the Balance Sheet ineffectiveness
Item
hedged item
line item
assessment
Assets
Liabilities
Assets
Liabilities
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
Hedged items in fair value hedges for
interest rate risk (Note 13)
Held against fixed rate mortgages
3,018.4
-
16.0
-
Loans & advances
49.0
to members
Held against fixed rate treasury assets
177.8
-
1.9
-
Debt securities
2.2
Held against fixed rate savings
-
2,203.2
-
(5.2)
Shares
(4.9)
3,196.2
2,203.2
17.9
(5.2)
46.3
2024
2024
2024
2024
2024
2024
Group and Society
Change in fair
value of hedged
Accumulated amount of fair item for
Carrying amount of hedged value adjustments on the Balance Sheet ineffectiveness
Item
hedged item
line item
assessment
Assets
Liabilities
Assets
Liabilities
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
Hedged items in fair value hedges for
interest rate risk (Note 13)
Loans & advances
Held against fixed rate mortgages
3,033.3
-
(34.5)
-
5.7
to members
Held against fixed rate treasury assets
48.9
-
0.3
-
Debt securities
(0.3)
Held against fixed rate savings
-
1,706.7
-
(0.3)
Shares
(1.7)
3,082.2
1,706.7
(34.2)
(0.3)
3.7
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page | 91 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Notes to the Accounts
for the years ended 31
st
December 2025 and 31
st
December 2024
31 Financial instruments (continued)
Market risk (continued)
The following table contains information regarding the effectiveness of the hedging relationships designated by the Group, as well as the impacts on profit or
loss:
2025
2025
Group and Society
Hedge ineffectiveness
recognised in Income Income Statement line item that includes
Statement
reclassified amount
£m
Fair value hedges
Interest rate swaps
Held against fixed rate mortgages
(2.8)
Net gains from derivative financial instruments
Held against fixed rate treasury assets
-
Net gains from derivative financial instruments
Held against fixed rate savings
(0.8)
Net gains from derivative financial instruments
(3.6)
2024
2024
Group and Society
Hedge ineffectiveness
recognised in Income Income Statement line item that includes
Statement
reclassified amount
£m
Fair value hedges
Interest rate swaps
Held against fixed rate mortgages
0.9
Net gains from derivative financial instruments
Held against fixed rate treasury assets
-
Net gains from derivative financial instruments
Held against fixed rate savings
(0.1)
Net gains from derivative financial instruments
0.8
32 Capital structure
The Society’s policy is to maintain a capital base to maintain member, creditor and market confidence and to sustain future development of the business. The
formal ICAAP assists the Society with its management of capital. Through its quarterly business plan update the Board monitors the Society’s capital position to
assess whether capital is held to mitigate the risks it faces in the course of its business activities. The Society’s actual and expected capital position is reviewed
against stated risk appetite which aims to maintain capital at a specific level above its TCR.
The Board manages the Society’s capital and risk exposures to maintain capital in line with regulatory requirements which includes monitoring of:
• Lending and business decisions - the Society uses application scorecards to help it assess whether mortgage applications fit within its appetite for credit
risk. Once loan funds have been advanced, behavioural scorecards are used to review the ongoing risk profile of both the portfolios and individual members.
In addition, for residential and BTL mortgages property values are updated on a quarterly basis.
• Pricing - pricing models are utilised for all mortgage product launches. The models include expected loss estimates and capital utilisation enabling the
calculation of a risk adjusted return on capital.
• Concentration risk - the design of retail products takes into account the overall mix of products to ensure that exposure to market risk remains within
permitted parameters.
• Counterparty risk - wholesale lending is only carried out with approved counterparties in line with the Society’s lending criteria and is subject to a range
of limits. The limits are monitored daily to ensure the Society remains within risk appetite.
This is subjected to regular stress tests to ensure the Society maintains sufficient capital for future possible events.
The Society’s regulatory capital consists of independently verified general reserves, accumulated gains and losses recognised in both the fair value and
revaluation reserves; less adjustments in relation to intangible assets, deferred tax and assets / liabilities held at fair value. Further information can be found in
the Pillar 3 disclosures which are published on the Society’s website.
The Group’s capital requirements are set and monitored by the PRA. During 2025, the Society has complied with the requirements included within the Capital
Requirements Directive V (Basel III). Further details of these requirements and their impact on the Society are provided in the Strategic Report on page 13.
There were no reported breaches of capital requirements during the year. There have been no material changes in the Society’s management of capital during
the year.
Under Basel III Pillar 3, the Society is required to publish further information regarding its capital position and exposures. The Society’s Pillar 3 disclosures are
available on our website.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page | 92 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Notes to the Accounts
for the years ended 31
st
December 2025 and 31
st
December 2024
33 Related party transactions
Transaction with Group companies
During the year, Nottingham Building Society has received £0.2 million (2024: £0.2 million) in fees for providing cash manager and mortgage servicer fees to
Arrow Mortgage Finance No.1 Limited and £0.3 million (2024: £nil) in fees for providing mortgage servicer fees to Lace Funding 2025-1 PLC.
Movement on the intercompany balances are disclosed in Note 16.
At the end of the year the following balances were outstanding between the Society and its subsidiaries:
2025
2025
2024
2024
Amount owed to
Amount owed by
Amount owed to
Amount owed by
subsidiaries subsidiaries subsidiaries subsidiaries
£m
£m
£m
£m
Arrow Mortgage Finance No. 1 Limited
(152.6)
33.4
(208.2)
33.4
Lace Funding 2025-1 PLC
(305.1)
44.0
-
-
(457.7)
77.4
(208.2)
33.4
Interest accrues on the balances outstanding with Arrow Mortgage Finance and Lace Funding 2025-1 PLC at SONIA plus a margin. The repayment of the loan
will follow the collection of the principal and interest of the underlying mortgage assets, used as security and have a contractual maturity of December 2026
and November 2074 respectively.
Transactions with key management personnel
Transactions with key management personnel are on the same terms and conditions applicable to members and other employees within the Group. The
Directors are considered to be the only key management personnel as defined by IAS 24, which includes Non-Executive Directors.
Compensation for key management personnel for the year totalled £1.7 million (2024: £1.7 million) and a breakdown is disclosed on page 40 in the Directors’
Remuneration Report.
In addition, the following transactions were undertaken through the normal course of business:
2025
2025
2024
2024
Amounts in
Amounts in
Number of key respect of key Number of key respect of key
management management management management
personnel and personnel and personnel and personnel and
their close family their close their close family their close
members
family members
members
family members
Group and Society
Number
£000
Number
£000
Share accounts
Net movement in the year
2
114
(2)
53
Balances outstanding 31
st
December
8
333
7
219
Subscribed capital
Net movement in the year
-
-
-
-
Balances outstanding 31
st
December
1
5
1
5
Interest payable on share accounts
-
-
-
-
Interest payable on subscribed capital
-
-
-
-
Directors’ loans and transactions
As at 31
st
December 2025 there were no (2024: no) outstanding secured mortgage loans made in the ordinary course of business at a normal commercial rate
to directors and their connected persons. A register is maintained at the head office of the Society that shows details of all loans, transactions and arrangements
with directors and their connected persons. A statement of the appropriate details contained in the register, for the financial year ended 31
st
December 2025,
will be available for inspection at the head office for a period of 15 days up to and including the AGM.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Page | 93 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Notes to the Accounts
for the years ended 31
st
December 2025 and 31
st
December 2024
34 Notes to the cash flow statements
2025
2024
Group and Society
Notes
£m
£m
Changes in liabilities arising from financing activities
Subscribed capital at 1
st
January
23.9
23.9
Accrued interest
1.9
1.9
Interest paid
(1.9)
(1.9)
Balance at 31
st
December
29
23.9
23.9
35 Loan commitments
2025
2024
Group and Society
£m
£m
Mortgage commitments
166.0
381.7
Committed facilities to fintech mortgage provider
67.2
71.4
Balance at 31
st
December
233.2
453.1
The Society has entered into a strategic partnership with a fintech mortgage provider and the outstanding balance from this commitment is presented above.
36 Registered office
Nottingham Building Society is a building society, incorporated and domiciled in the UK. The address of its registered office is Nottingham House, 3 Fulforth
Street, Nottingham, NG1 3DL.
Page | 94 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Annual Business Statement
1 Statutory percentages
2025
Statutory
limit
%
%
Lending limit
Proportion of business assets not in the form of loans fully secured on residential property
3.20
25
Funding limit
Proportion of shares and borrowings not in the form of shares held by individuals
9.06
50
The percentages are calculated in accordance with, and the statutory limits are those prescribed by, sections 6 and 7 of the Building Societies Act 1986 and
are based on the Group Statement of Financial Position.
Business assets are the total assets of the Society and its subsidiary undertakings as shown in the Group’s Statement of Financial Position plus impairment for
losses on loans and advances (Note 15), less property, plant and equipment, intangible assets and liquid assets.
Loans fully secured on residential property are the amount of principal owing by borrowers and interest accrued not yet payable.
Total ‘shares and borrowings’ are the aggregate of ‘shares’, ‘amounts owed to credit institutions’, ‘amounts owed to other members’ and ‘debt securities in
issue’ in the Group’s Statement of Financial Position. Shares held by individuals are found in Note 21.
2 Other percentages
2025
2024
%
%
As a percentage of shares and borrowings:
Gross capital
5.71
5.65
Free capital
5.22
5.26
Liquid assets 21.02 18.66
As a percentage of mean total assets:
Profit after taxation
0.20
0.19
Management expenses (Group)
1.28
1.33
Management expenses (Society)
1.26
1.32
As a percentage of year-end assets
Return on assets
0.20
0.17
The above percentages have been calculated from the Group’s Financial Statements.
‘Shares and borrowings’ are the aggregate of ‘shares’, ‘amounts owed to credit institutions’, ‘amounts owed to other members’ and ‘debt securities in issue’
in the Group’s Statement of Financial Position.
‘Gross capital’ is the aggregate of subscribed capital and aggregated reserves as shown in the Group’s Statement of Financial Position.
‘Free capital’ is gross capital less property, plant and equipment, lease assets and intangible assets in the Group’s Statement of Financial Position.
‘Mean total assets’ are calculated by halving the aggregate of total assets at the beginning and end of the financial year for the Group.
‘Liquid assets’ are the first three items on the asset side of the Group’s Statement of Financial Position.
‘Management expenses’ are the aggregate of administrative expenses (excluding acquisition and merger costs) and depreciation and amortisation taken from
the Group’s Statement of Comprehensive Income.
Page | 95 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Annual Business Statement
3 Information about the Directors at 31
st
December 2025
Director’s name
Date of appointment
Business occupation
Other directorships and offices
Robin Ashton
01.12.23
Non-Executive
Domestic and General Limited
Domestic and General Insurance Europe AG
Domestic and General Insurance plc
Pollen Street Capital Funds III & IV
Simon Baum
Chief Risk Officer
18.06.18
NBS Executive
Baum Associates Limited
Sue Hayes
Chief Executive
08.03.22
NBS Executive
N/A
Anthony Murphy
Chief Financial Officer
23.06.23
NBS Executive
University of Nottingham
Peter O’Donnell
01.01.21
Non-Executive
Queen Victoria NHS Foundation Trust
One Family
Kavita Patel
01.01.17
Non-Executive
Foresight Enterprise VCT PLC
Kerry Spooner
01.09.16
Non-Executive
ANZ Bank - UK Branch
The Bank of Nova Scotia – UK Branch
Chris Sparks 01.03.25 Non-Executive
Unity Trust Bank PLC
Durham University
University of Edinburgh
Clodagh Gunnigle 22.09.25 Non-Executive
Admiral Financial Services Limited
Alpha Bank London Limited
Sonas
Executive directors’ service contracts:
The CEO’s contract is terminable at any time by the Society on 12 months’ notice and by the CEO on 12 months’ notice. The contracts for the other Executive
Directors are terminable at any time by the Society on six months’ notice and by the individual on six months’ notice. Unless notice to terminate is given by
either party, all contracts continue automatically.
Page | 96 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Glossary
Set out below are the definitions of the terms used within the Annual Report and Accounts to assist the reader and to facilitate comparison with other
financial institutions:
Term
Definition
Additional Tier 1 capital (‘AT1’)
Capital that meets certain rules under the Capital Requirements Directive (CRD) and comprises the Society’s
Permanent Interest Bearing Shares (PIBS), but only under transitional provisions.
Arrears
A member is in arrears when they are behind in meeting contractual obligations, resulting in an overdue
loan payment. The value of arrears is the total of missed payments.
Basel III
A global regulatory framework setting strengthened standards for bank capital adequacy and liquidity.
Buy-to-let loans (‘BTL’)
Loans offered to members purchasing residential property specifically to let out and generate rental
income.
Capital Requirements Directive (‘CRD’)
Comprises the Capital Requirements Regulation (‘CRR’) and the Capital Requirements Directive, which
outline the capital requirements framework and introduce liquidity requirements used by regulators when
supervising firms.
Common Equity Tier 1 capital (‘CET1’)
Internally generated capital from retained profits and other reserves, less intangible assets and regulatory
deductions. CET1 capital is fully loss-absorbing.
Common Equity Tier 1 ratio
CET1 capital expressed as a percentage of risk-weighted assets.
Contractual maturity
The date on which a loan or financial instrument expires, when all outstanding principal and interest
become due.
Cost income ratio
Represents administrative expenses as a proportion of total income. On an underlying basis, excludes one-
off strategic investment costs and fair value gains or losses from derivatives.
Credit risk
The risk that a member or counterparty fails to meet contractual obligations.
Debt securities
Certificates of indebtedness issued by credit institutions, public bodies or other undertakings, excluding
those issued by central banks.
Debt securities in issue
Transferable certificates of indebtedness issued by the Society to the bearer. These are Group liabilities and
include certificates of deposit.
Derivative financial instruments
Contracts whose value is based on an underlying price or index, such as interest rates or exchange rates.
Used by the Society to hedge interest rate risk.
Effective interest rate method (‘EIR’)
Allocates interest income or expense over the relevant period, including fees and penalties integral to the
contract.
Expected Credit Loss (‘ECL’)
The present value of all cash shortfalls over the expected life of a financial instrument, used for impairment
provisions under IFRS 9.
Exposure
The maximum potential loss if a borrower or counterparty fails to meet obligations.
Exposure at Default (‘EAD’)
An IFRS 9 component estimating the balance profile of each mortgage account over its expected
behavioural lifetime.
Fair value
The amount for which an asset could be exchanged or a liability settled between knowledgeable, willing
parties in an arm’s length transaction.
Fair value through other
comprehensive income (‘FVOCI’)
Financial assets measured at fair value with changes recognised in other comprehensive income.
Fair value through profit or loss
(‘FVPL’)
Financial assets measured at fair value with changes recognised in the Income Statement.
Financial Conduct Authority (‘FCA’)
The UK statutory body responsible for conduct regulation and supervision of authorised firms.
Financial Services Compensation
Scheme (‘FSCS’)
The UK’s compensation fund of last resort for members of authorised financial services firms, funded by
industry levies.
Fintech
A company focused on technology-enabled financial innovation.
Forbearance strategies
Measures to support borrowers in financial difficulty, such as temporary payment reductions or term
extensions, aimed at avoiding repossession.
Free capital
Gross capital and collective impairment provisions less property, plant and equipment and intangible
assets.
Funding limit
Proportion of shares and borrowings not in the form of shares held by individuals, as explained in the
Annual Business Statement.
Interest rate risk
Risk of loss due to changes in market interest rates, affecting mortgages and savings products.
Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment
Process (‘ICAAP’)
The Society’s own assessment of capital needs under Basel III, including stress scenarios.
Internal Liquidity Adequacy
Assessment Process (‘ILAAP’)
The Society’s assessment of liquidity resources required to remain within risk tolerances under various
stress scenarios.
Lending limit
Proportion of business assets not in the form of loans fully secured on residential property.
Leverage ratio
Tier 1 capital divided by total exposures, including on- and off-balance sheet items.
Liquid assets
Cash in hand, loans and advances to credit institutions, and debt securities.
Liquid asset ratio
Liquid assets expressed as a percentage of shares and borrowings.
Liquidity risk
Risk that the Society cannot meet financial obligations as they fall due or can only do so at excessive cost.
Loan-to-value ratio (‘LTV’)
Mortgage amount expressed as a percentage of the property value.
Loans past due
Loans on which a payment has not been made by its due date.
Loss Given Default (‘LGD’)
An IFRS 9 component estimating the likely loss on asset disposal if default occurs.
Management expenses
Administrative expenses, depreciation and amortisation.
Management expense ratio
Management expenses expressed as a percentage of mean total assets, excluding one-off strategic
investment costs.
Page | 97 Annual Report & Accounts 2025 Nottingham Building Society
Glossary
Market risk
The risk that movements in market risk factors, including foreign exchange rates, interest rates, credit
spreads and member-driven factors, will create potential losses or decrease the value of the Society’s
Balance Sheet.
Mean total assets
Represents the amount produced by halving the aggregate of total assets at the beginning and end of the
financial year.
Member
A person who has a share investment or a mortgage loan with the Society.
Net interest income
The difference between interest receivable on assets and similar income and interest paid on liabilities and
similar charges.
Net interest margin
A ratio expressing net interest income as a percentage of mean total assets.
Operational risk
The risk of loss arising from inadequate or failed internal processes, people and systems, or from external
events.
Permanent Interest Bearing Shares
(‘PIBS’) / Subscribed capital
Unsecured, deferred shares of the Society which rank behind the claims of all depositors, payables and
investing members. PIBS are also known as subscribed capital.
Probability of Default (‘PD’)
An IFRS 9 component estimating the likelihood that a borrower will default over a fixed time period. A 12-
month ECL uses a 12-month PD, while a lifetime ECL uses the estimated PD over the remaining contractual
life.
Prudential Regulation Authority (‘PRA’)
The statutory body responsible for prudential supervision of banks, building societies, insurers and certain
investment firms in the UK. A subsidiary of the Bank of England.
Renegotiated loans
Loans where terms have been modified by agreement between borrower and lender, either as part of an
ongoing relationship or due to financial difficulty.
Residential loans
Loans to individuals secured against residential property.
Right-of-use asset
A lessee’s right to use an asset over the life of a lease, measured as lease liabilities plus initial direct costs,
less incentives received.
Risk appetite
The level of risk the Society is willing to accept to safeguard members’ interests while achieving business
objectives.
Risk-weighted assets (‘RWA’)
Assets adjusted under Basel III rules to reflect their risk profile.
Secured business lending (‘SBL’)
Loans secured on commercial property, available to SMEs, including limited company buy-to-let lending.
Shares
Funds deposited by a person in a retail savings account with the Society, recorded as liabilities.
Shares and borrowings
Aggregate of shares, amounts owed to credit institutions, amounts owed to other members and debt
securities in issue.
Significant increase in credit risk
(‘SICR’)
Occurs when credit risk has moved significantly since initial recognition, based on quantitative and
qualitative factors.
Special Purpose Vehicle (‘SPV’)
A legal entity created for specific objectives, used by the Society for securitisation activities.
SPPI test
Assessment of whether contractual terms give rise to cash flows that are solely payments of principal and
interest.
Stage 1, Stage 2, Stage 3
IFRS 9 impairment stages: Stage 1: No significant increase in credit risk; 12-month ECL applies. Stage 2:
Significant increase in credit risk; lifetime ECL applies. Stage 3: Credit-impaired assets; lifetime ECL applies.
Standardised approach
Basic method for calculating capital requirements for credit risk using prescribed risk weights.
Term Funding with additional
incentives for SMEs (‘TFSME’)
Bank of England and HM Treasury scheme providing funding to stimulate SME lending.
Tier 1 capital
Comprises CET1 and AT1.
Tier 1 ratio
Tier 1 capital as a percentage of risk-weighted assets.
Tier 2 capital
Includes collective impairment allowance (for exposures treated on a Standardised basis), less regulatory
deductions.
Total Capital Requirement (‘TCR’)
Total capital required by the regulator, comprising Pillar 1 and Pillar 2A capital.
Underlying profit
Management’s measure of underlying performance, excluding one-off volatility and non-recurring items.
Wholesale funding
Amounts owed to credit institutions, other members and debt securities in issue.